Recovery Manual PDF

User's Manual
R-Studio
© R-Tools Technology Inc 2019.

All rights reserved.
www.r-tt.com
© R-tools Technology Inc 2019.
All rights reserved.
No part of this User's Manual may be copied, altered, or transferred to, any other media
without written, explicit consent from R-tools Technology Inc..
All brand or product names appearing herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
R-tools Technology Inc. has developed this User's Manual to the best of its knowledge,
but does not guarantee that the program will fulfill all the desires of the user.
No warranty is made in regard to specifications or features.
R-tools Technology Inc. retains the right to make alterations to the content of this
Manual without the obligation to inform third parties.
Contents I
Table of Contents
I Introduction to R-Studio 1
1 R-Studio Features
................................................................................................................................... 1
2 System Requirements
................................................................................................................................... 4
3 Contact Information
...................................................................................................................................
and Technical Support 4
4 R-Studio Main
...................................................................................................................................
Panel 5
5 R-Studio...................................................................................................................................
Settings 10
II Data Recovery Using R-Studio 17

1 Basic File
...................................................................................................................................
Recovery 18
Searching for a File
.......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Finding Previous..........................................................................................................................................................
File Versions 28
Preview ing Files.......................................................................................................................................................... 29
File Masks .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Regular Expressions
.......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Event Log .......................................................................................................................................................... 36
2 Advanced
...................................................................................................................................
Data Recovery 37
Disk Scan .......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Custom izing File..........................................................................................................................................................
Types 50
Types-I 52
Types-II 54
Regions .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Exclusive Regions.......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Im ages .......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Object Copy .......................................................................................................................................................... 66
3 Mass File
...................................................................................................................................
Recovery 71
Find and Mark Multiple Files
.......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Recover Multiple..........................................................................................................................................................
Files 73
File Recovery Lists
.......................................................................................................................................................... 75
4 Volume ...................................................................................................................................
Sets and RAIDs 79
Volum e Sets, Stripe Sets, and Mirrors
.......................................................................................................................................................... 81
Basic RAID 4 and..........................................................................................................................................................
RAID 5 Operations 84
Working w ith RAID 6 Presets
.......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Working w ith RAID6 (Double Xor) Presets
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Working w ith RAIDs w ith Parity Delays
.......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Working w ith Advanced RAID Layouts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Nested and Non-Standard RAID Levels
.......................................................................................................................................................... 102
RAID10 (1+0)......................................................................................................................................................... 103
RAID1E ......................................................................................................................................................... 104
RAID5E ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
RAID5EE ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
RAID6E ......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Finding RAID Param eters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 112
Checking RAID ..........................................................................................................................................................
Consistency 114
Syntax of a Description File for RAID Configurations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 115
Description Files for RAID Configurations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Reverse RAIDs .......................................................................................................................................................... 126
© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

II R-Studio Manual
Reverse RAID.........................................................................................................................................................
of an Object 126
Reverse RAID.........................................................................................................................................................
of a RAID 128
Various Disk and Volum e Managers
.......................................................................................................................................................... 129
Window s Dynamic
.........................................................................................................................................................
Disks 129
Window s Storage
.........................................................................................................................................................
Spaces 132
Apple RAIDs ......................................................................................................................................................... 135
Apple CoreStorage/File
.........................................................................................................................................................
Vault/Fusion Drive Volumes 138
Linux mdadm.........................................................................................................................................................
RAIDs 139
Linux LVM/LVM2
......................................................................................................................................................... 141
5 Data Recovery
...................................................................................................................................
over Network 143
R-Studio Agent .......................................................................................................................................................... 144
R-Studio Agent
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Window s 144
R-Studio Agent
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Mac 146
R-Studio Agent
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Linux 147
Data Recovery over Netw ork
.......................................................................................................................................................... 149
Connecting over the Internet
.......................................................................................................................................................... 150
III Text/hexadecimal Editor 154

1 Viewing
...................................................................................................................................
and Editing Objects 155
2 Navigating
...................................................................................................................................
through an Object 161
3 Data Copy
................................................................................................................................... 163
4 Files and
...................................................................................................................................
Sectors 164
5 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
Custom Patterns 165
6 Pattern...................................................................................................................................
Example I 168
7 Pattern...................................................................................................................................
Example II 172
IV Technical Information and Troubleshooting 176

1 IntelligentScan
...................................................................................................................................
Technology 176
2 Data Recovery
...................................................................................................................................
Issues 177
3 Extended
...................................................................................................................................
Information Recovery 179
4 Data Formats
...................................................................................................................................
and Multipliers 180
5 Data Recovery
...................................................................................................................................
on HFS/HFS+ File System 180
6 Bad Sectors
................................................................................................................................... 181
7 File Information
...................................................................................................................................
(R-Studio Technician) 182
8 Memory...................................................................................................................................
Usage 183
9 Forensic
...................................................................................................................................
Mode 184
10 R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Switches 199
11 Properties
...................................................................................................................................
Tab 200
V Working with the Third-Party Hardware 206

1 DeepSpar
...................................................................................................................................
Disk Imager™ 206
VI R-Studio Emergency 212

1 Contact...................................................................................................................................
Informaiton and Technical Support 212
2 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
Startup Disks 213

Contents III
Installing R-Studio Em ergency Startup Media Creator

.......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Creating Startup Disks Using R-Studio Em ergency Startup Media Creator
.......................................................................................................................................................... 213
Creating Startup Disks on Mac and Linux Com puters
.......................................................................................................................................................... 219
3 R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Emergency Operation 219
Starting a Com puter w ith the R-Studio Em ergency Startup Disks
.......................................................................................................................................................... 219
File Recovery .......................................................................................................................................................... 222
Searching for a..........................................................................................................................................................
File 222
Disk Scan .......................................................................................................................................................... 223
Disk Im ages .......................................................................................................................................................... 224
4 Using R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Emergency as an Emergency Agent 225
5 R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Emergency Technical Information 229
Properties and..........................................................................................................................................................
Text/Hexadecim al View er 230
Netw ork Drives.......................................................................................................................................................... 230
Log .......................................................................................................................................................... 231
Devices to Store Recovered Files
.......................................................................................................................................................... 231
6 R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Emergency Hardware Compatibility List 234
VII R-Studio Agent Emergency 239

1 Contact...................................................................................................................................
Information and Technical Support 239
2 Installing
...................................................................................................................................
R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator 239
3 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
Startup Disks 239
4 Starting...................................................................................................................................
a Computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Disk 245
5 R-Studio
...................................................................................................................................
Agent Emergency Hardware Compatibility List 248
Disk Controllers
.......................................................................................................................................................... 248
Netw ork Cards.......................................................................................................................................................... 258
Index 270

1 R-Studio Manual
I Introduction to R-Studio
R-Studio is a family of powerful and cost-effective undelete and data recovery software. Empowered by new
unique data recovery technologies, it is the most comprehensive data recovery solution for recovering files from
FAT/exFAT, NTFS, NTFS5, ReFS/ReFS2+ (Windows), HFS/HFS+ and APFS (Macintosh), Little and Big
Endian variants of UFS1/?UFS2 (FreeBSD/?OpenBSD/?NetBSD/?Solaris), Ext2/3/4FS (Linux) partitions. It
functions on local and network disks, even if such partitions are formatted, damaged or deleted. Flexible
parameter settings give you absolute control over the data recovery.
R-Studio Features
System Requirements
Contact Information and Technical Support
Data Recovery Using R-Studio
Basic File Recovery
Advanced Data Recovery
Mass File Recovery
Volume Sets and RAIDs
Data Recovery over Network
Text/?hexadecimal editor
Technical Information and Troubleshooting
Working with the Third-Party Hardware
R-Studio Emergency
R-Studio Agent Emergency
Window s Window s 2000, XP, Vista, 7,8/8.1, 10, Window s Server 2003, 2008, 2012, 2016 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Mac OS X, OS X, and macOS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective ow ners.
1.1 R-Studio Features

R-Studio is a family of file restoring utilities. It recovers files both on local disks and on disks on remote
computers over network, even if their partition structures are damaged. A unique IntelligentScan technology and
flexible parameter settings give you real control over the fastest data recovery ever seen.
R-Studio features:
· Standard "Windows Explorer" - style interface.
· Host OS: An Intel-compatible platform running Windows 10 /8.1/8 /7 /Vista /XP /2000 Windows Server
2019 /2016 /2012 /2008 /2003.
· Automatic check for updates.
· Remotely recovers data over network. Data can be recovered on network computers running Windows,
MacOS X, Linux, and some other UNIX OS.
· Supported file systems: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, exFAT, NTFS, NTFS5, ReFS/ReFS2+ file (Resilient
File System), Ext2/3/4FS (created by Linux or other OS), HFS, HFS+, HFSX, APFS, and UFS1, UFS2,
UFS BigEndian (used by the FreeBSD, OpenBSD, and NetBSD operating systems).
Please note, that when a file is being deleted on the HFS, HFS+, HFSX file systems, the computer
completely removes all system information on it, and there is no way to recover the deleted file except by
Introduction to R-Studio 2
using the Extra Search for Known File Types option. Nevertheless, R-Studio is able to read existing files
from HFS, HFS+, and HFSX disks.
· Support for known file types. R-Studio searches for files with known typical features of their structures
allowing the user to search for files on devices with unknown files systems, including an HD, CD, DVD,
floppy disk, Compact Flash Card, USB drive, ZIP drive, Memory Sticks, and other removable media.
· Scan process visualization. While scanning an object, R-Studio graphically shows items that have been
found, including files of known types, FAT and NTFS MFT records, boot records, etc.
· Mass file recovery support.
· Support for estimation of chances for successful recovery.
· Support for file recovery lists - lists of files that can be exported from R-Studio, manually edited, and then
loaded back. Files from such lists will be automatically marked for recovery.
· APM, Basic and GPT support. R-Studio supports all three partition schemes used to define the low-level
organization of data on disks formatted for use with Macintosh computers.
· Dynamic disk support.
· Software RAID, volume set, and stripe set support. Support for RAID 6, RAID 5, and RAID 4 layouts.
Support for custom RAID layouts. Parameters like block size and order, offsets, and even the number of
stripe blocks can be explicitly specified. Custom RAID configurations can be saved.
· Support for Windows Storage Spaces, created by Windows 8/8.1 and Windows 10/?Threshold 2/?
Anniversary/?Fall Creators updates.
· Support for Apple software RAIDs
· Support for Apple CoreStorage/?File Vault/?Fusion Drive Volumes
· Support for Linux mdadm Volumes
· Support for Linux LVM/LVM2
· RAID consistency check (check for valid data parity values).
· Hardware RAID, volume set, and stripe set support.
· Automatic RAID parameter recognition.
· Reverse RAIDs: A technique that decomposes real disk objects into virtual RAIDs. Then those components
of reverse RAID scan be processed like real objects. They can be viewed, edited, imaged, copied to
physical drives, etc. This technique also can re-construct data on the real parents of a virtual RAID. For
example, it becomes possible to re-construct data on a missing disk.
· Creates image files for an entire hard drive, logical disk, or its part. Such image files can be processed like
regular disks. Images can be either simple exact object copies (Plain images) compatible with the previous
versions of R-Studio, or compressed images that can be compressed, split into several parts, and
password-protected. Such images are fully compatible with the images created by R-Drive Image, but
incompatible with the previous versions of R-Studio. Images may be saved either on the local or remote
computer. R-Studio can scan objects while creating their images. Images can be connected to the operating
system as devices which makes their content accessible to any program including any other data recovery
software.
· Advanced object copy. In addition to byte to byte copy of any object visible in the Drives panel, smart copy
of partitions and hard drives is available.
· Recovers files on damaged or deleted partitions.
· Recovers compressed files (NTFS, NTFS5).
· Recovers encrypted files (NTFS5).
· Recovers alternative data streams (NTFS, NTFS5).

3 R-Studio Manual
· Support for NTFS deduplication.

· Support for Symbolic links. Symbolic link recovery options in the Technician version.
· Support for file system journal on the HFS+ and Ext3/4fs file systems.
· Support for soft updates journal on the UFS file system.
· Support for extended attributes on the HFS+, Ext3/4fs, and UFS file systems.
· Support for compressed files on the HFS+ file system.
· Extended file information (R-Studio Technician)
· Recognizes localized names.
· Recovered files can be saved on any (including network) disks visible to the host operating system.
· A hexadecimal disk and file editor supporting NTFS file non-resident attribute editing.
· Patterns (or templates) in the hexadecimal editor allowing for parsing the data according to specific data
structure. Such patterns may be custom-created.
· File preview. Most of the file types can be previewed to estimate recovery chances.
· Enhanced remote host scanning procedure. In the R-Studio network versions, data is analyzed on the
remote host rather than on the home host, thereby the speed of recovery procedure greatly increases. The
scan information may be saved either on the local or remote computer.
· Recovered files may be saved on a disk on a connected remote computer rather than be transferred over
network to the local one. Saving recovered files on a remote computer may be useful when the remote
computer has a healthy disk because you do not have to transfer files over network. It may be an external
USB hard drive, for example.
· Support for S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) attribute monitoring.
· Forensic mode. (For the Technician version only).
· Support for third-party hardware. (For the Technician version only).
· R-Studio Emergency*. The R-Studio Emergency version starts from a floppy or compact disk when it is
necessary to recover data on a computer, on which Windows cannot start up because its system files are
corrupted or deleted.
*The R-Studio Emergency is a part of the R-Studio software package. When you buy an R-Studio single
license you may run the R-Studio Emergency or/and install the R-Studio Windows version on one PC only
and you may not transfer the licensed software to another PC.
R-Studio recovers files:
· That have been removed without the Recycle Bin, or when the Recycle Bin has been emptied;
· Removed by virus attack or power failure;
· After the partition with the files was reformatted, even for a different file system;
· When the partition structure on a hard drive was changed or damaged. In this case, R-Studio can scan the
drive trying to find previously existed partitions and recover files from found partitions.
· From disks with bad sectors. In this case, R-Studio can first copy the entire disk or its part into an image file
and then process such image file.
R-Studio can create image files for an entire hard drive, logical disk, or its part. Such image files can be
processed like regular disks. Images are very useful if there is a risk of total data loss due to hardware
malfunction. If bad blocks are constantly appearing on a hard drive, the only way to save the data is to
immediately create an image of that drive. All data search, scan and recovery can be done from this image.

To learn more about the IntelligentScan technology, go to the IntelligentScan topic .

1.2 System Requirements
· An Intel-compatible platform running Windows 10 /8.1/8 /7 /Vista /XP /2000 Windows Server
2019 /2016 /2012 /2008 /2003
· At least 256 MB of RAM, a mouse, and enough disk space for recovered files, image files, etc.
· The administrative privileges are required to install and run R-Studio utilities.
· A network connection for data recovering over network.
1.3 Contact Information and Technical Support

To obtain the latest version of R-Studio, go to:
Product Site: http://www.r-tt.com
Sales Department: sales@r-tt.com
R-Studio Technical Support Team is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and has an average response
time less than 4 hours.
Tech. Support: support@r-tt.com
Send your support request to: http://www.r-tt.com/SupportRequest.shtml
File Recovery FAQ: http://www.r-tt.com/File_Recovery_FAQ.shtml

R-tt Forum: http://forum.r-tt.com

5 R-Studio Manual
1.4 R-Studio Main Panel

When R-Studio starts, its main panel appears on the Windows desktop.
R-Studio Main panel
Drives panel:
You can select an object by clicking it.
A logical disk may be represented by its name or its partition.

Properties tab:
This tab shows the properties of an object selected on the Drives panel.
Depending on the selected object, information on this Properties tab may vary.
The Properties tab names and values are described in detail on the Properties tab topic.
Log panel
S.M.A.R.T. Info for a Hard Drive

R-Studio shows hard drive S.M.A.R.T. states using their icons.
Hard drive S.M.A.R.T. states and icons

7 R-Studio Manual
Normal: This state indicates

that the hard drive is in good
conditions.
Warning: This state indicates

that some small problems
with the disk are possible in
the future, you may work
with it but with cautions and
regular check of these
parameters. Disk imaging is
strongly recommended.

Critical: This state indicates

that the hard drive
conditions are critical and
chances of hardware failure
are great. The best
recommendation for this
case is to stop working with
the disk and bring it to
professional data recovery
specialists. You may though
continue to work with the
disk at your own risk, but
disk imaging is very strongly
recommended.
When a hard drive is selected on the R-Studio main panel, an additional S.M.A.R.T. tab will appear. You may
view the detailed S.M.A.R.T. data of the drive.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) is a technology widely-used in hard drives
and solid-state devices that monitors their reliability conditions to predict possible hardware failures.
Changing the program language
You may select the language of R-Studio main panel and its help. To do so, select an available language on
Change Language on the Help menu.
Panel view options

You may set which panels and bars to enable/?disable.
To enable/disable:
Toolbar Select/clear Toolbar on the View menu
Status bar Select/clear Status bar on the View menu
Drive pane Select/clear Device View on the View menu
Properties pane Select/clear Properties View on the View menu
Log panel Select/clear Event Log on the View menu
If you have several tabs in the right pane, you may easily switch to any of the tab by selecting on the View
menu
Properties Tab to view the Properties tab
Scan Information to view the Scan Information Tab tab
Tab
Parents Tab to view the Parents tab
Properties Select data types in which the data will be represented

9 R-Studio Manual
Connect to Remote
Click this button to connect to a remote computer on a network.
Refresh
Click this button to refresh the panels.
Scan
Click this button to start scanning a selected object.
Open Drive Files

Click this button to start searching for files on a selected object.
Open Image
Click this button to open a previously created image.
Create Image
Click this button to create an image of a selected area.
Create Region
Click this button to create a region on a selected disk.
Create Virtual RAID

Click this button to create a virtual volume set or RAID.
Select an appropriate type from the menu.
Remove
Click this button to remove a selected object on the main panel.
Stop
Click this button to stop the current operation.
Sometimes, there may be a lot of similar objects on the Drives panel. Those may be components of a RAID, for
example. You may turn numerical indexes for such objects to distinguish them better. Those indexes will appear
before the object names on the Drives panel.
To turn the numerical indexes on/off, go to the Device item on the View menu, and select/clear:
Show Physical Drives Indexes to display the indexes only for hard drives
Show All Objects Indexes to display the indexes for all objects on the Drives panel
You may select the units in which object's start and size are displayed

To select the units

1 Select Devices on the View menu
2 Select the units in which you want to see object sizes.
You may select
Show as Bytes
Show as Sectors
Show as Bytes and Sectors
Depending on the task R-Studio performs, its panel may vary. Those panels are described in appropriate topics.
The Properties tab names and values are described in detail on the Properties tab topic.
The general settings can be set on the Settings dialog box.
You may also copy the object's information displayed on the Drives panel. Right-click the object on the
necessary column and select Copy Device/Disk, Copy Label, and so on.
R-Studio has two operation modes:
File search on a partition (including recently found during disk scan).
In this mode, R-Studio analyzes MFTs on NTFS partitions, FATs on FAT partitions, and SuperBlocks on
Ext2/3/4FS partitions. Then it displays all files which records have been found in the analyzed tables. Then
recently deleted files, which records still remain, can be recovered. If files have not been found, that means that
their records have been deleted. In this case, the disk must be scanned.
File search supports file masks and regular expressions. Multiple files in different folders can be found and
recovered in one recover session.
R-Studio supports mass file recovery. There is no limit in the number of files that may be recovered during one
session.
File content may be previewed before recovery.
File or disk binary data can be viewed and edited in the Text/?hexadecimal editor. Also can be viewed and
changed all attributes for NTFS files.
Disk scan, searching for partitions.
In this mode, R-Studio scans the entire disk or its part. Using a number of statistic and deterministic criteria
known as IntelligentScan technology, it determines existing or existed partitions on the disk, and their file
systems. It is also possible to add new partitions, by setting manually all required parameters.
A disk can be scanned through several successive scans, each with its own parameters. R-Studio accumulates
the information from successive scans and keeps track of changes in the information obtained from different
scans. The information obtained from the disc scan can be stored in a file. It may be loaded and processed
later at any convenient time.
1.5 R-Studio Settings
You may specify some global setting for R-Studio on the Settings dialog box. You may reach it by selecting
Settings on the Tools menu.

11 R-Studio Manual
Main
Main dialog box
Main settings
System Options
Check for update If this box is selected, R-Studio will automatically check for updates.
If this check box is selected, R-Studio displays an additional
command Create FS Snapshot on the shortcut menu for an object
with a file system. An FS Snapshot contains system data for the file
Debug Mode
system only (file descriptions without file contents). If a problem
appears, this snapshot can be sent to R-Studio technical support to
identify the problem. This option greatly slows R-Studio.
If this box is selected, R-Studio automatically refreshes the list of
Auto-refresh Drive Tree connected disks. You may disable it if R-Studio experiences
problems with connected devices.
If this check box is selected, R-Studio enables you to write any
Enable Write
changes made in the Text/?hexadecimal editor.
Maximum amount of data stored for the Undo command in the Text/?
Max changes buffer size
hexadecimal editor.
Notifications
This button enables all previously disabled notification and warning
Reset all hidden notifications
messages.
User's file types
Specifies a file name and path to the file where the descriptions of
user's known file types are stored. You need to re-start R-Studio or
File name
click the Reload User's File Types button on the Known File Types tab
for the new file to take effect.
User's RAID layout
Specifies a file name and path to the file where the descriptions of
File name
user's RAID layouts are stored
User's Text/?hexadecimal editor templates

Specifies the path for pattern description files for Text/?

hexadecimal
Location
editor.
User's file mask presets
File name: Specifies a file name and path to the file with file mask presets.
File Systems
File Systems dialog box
File Systems
Default encoding for HFS volumes Select the national encoding for the HFS partitions.
Default encoding for Ext2/?Ext3/? Select the national encoding for the Ext2, Ext3, Ext4, and UFS
Ext4/?UFS volumes partitions.
Select this option if the number of files on the disk is so large that
Disable any sorting
R-Studio sorts files in selected folders for too long time.
Select this option if a lot of bad sectors are on the hard drive.
Minimize disk access R-Studio will reduce access to internal files in the file system to
speed up the interpretation of file system data.
Show deleted empty folders Select this option if you want to view empty deleted folders.
Symbolic Links
Settings are available in the Technician version only!
Symbolic links (of symlinks for short) are object that contains references to other files or folders directory in the
form of absolute or relative paths and that affect pathname resolution. For example, if a symlink C:
\ProgramData\Documents points to D:\Recovered Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents, entering it
will result in entering D:\Recovered Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents.

13 R-Studio Manual
Symbolic Links dialog box
Symbolic Links
Automatic recovery (Default)
If both an object and its symlink are selected for recovery, both the
object and its symlink will be recovered. The file path in that symlink
will be converted from absolute to relative. Example: If the object C:
Both an object and its symlink are \ProgramData\Documents is a symlink to C:
selected for recovery: \Users\Public\Documents, it will be converted to a symlink to
..\Users\Public\Documents. Therefore, the symlink will point
to its object regardless of the place to which the object has been
recovered.
Only an object is selected for
Only the selected object will be recovered.
recovery:
Only a symlink is selected for
The selected symlink will be recovered as a real object.
recovery:
Automatic recovery without symlink object path conversion
will remain the same.
Example:
The place to store recovered data: D:\Recovered Files.
The object to recover: C:\Users\Public\Documents
The symlink: C:\ProgramData\Documents
Both an object and its symlink are After recovery:
selected for recovery: The recovered object: D:\Recovered
Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents
The recovered symlink: D:\Recovered
Files\Root\ProgramData\Documents pointing to C:
\Users\Public\Documents.
Therefore, if someone tries to enter the symlink, the system will open
the object C:\Users\Public\Documents, rather than recovered
D:\Recovered Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents.


recovery:
Only a symlink is selected for
The selected symlink will be recovered as a real object.
recovery:
Recovery as it is
will remain the same.
Example:
The place to store recovered data: D:\Recovered Files.
The object to recover: C:\Users\Public\Documents
The symlink: C:\ProgramData\Documents
Both an object and its symlink are After recovery:
selected for recovery: The recovered object: D:\Recovered
Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents
The recovered symlink: D:\Recovered
Files\Root\ProgramData\Documents pointing to C:
\Users\Public\Documents.
Therefore, if someone tries to enter to the symlink, the system will
open the object C:\Users\Public\Documents, rather than
recovered D:\Recovered
Files\Root\Users\Public\Documents.
recovery:
Only a symlink is selected for The symlink will be recovered as a symlink containing a path to a
recovery: nonexistent object.
Log
Log dialog box
Log options
Logging

15 R-Studio Manual
Maximum
messages in the Specifies the maximum number of messages R-Studio will keep in the event log
Event Log
If this check box is selected, R-Studio writes its log into a log file specified in the File
Save log to file
name field.
File name Specifies the file name in which the log will be saved.
Type
File If this check box is selected, R-Studio logs all events with recovered files.
File System If this check box is selected, R-Studio logs all events with the file system.
Partition If this check box selected, R-Studio logs all events with partitions.
Recover If this check box is selected, R-Studio logs all events with the recovering processes.
Disk If this check box is selected, R-Studio logs all events with disks.
Network If this check box is selected, R-Studio logs all events with network operation.
Severity
Error If this check box is selected, R-Studio adds error messages into its log.
Warning If this check box is selected, R-Studio adds warning messages into its log.
Information If this check box is selected, R-Studio adds information messages into its log.
Success If this check box is selected, R-Studio adds success messages into its log.
NEVER WRITE A LOG FILE ON THE DISK FROM WHICH YOU RECOVER DATA!!!
Or you may obtain unpredictable results and lose all your data.
Note: If in the Recover dialog box the Condense successful restoration events check box is selected, the
Log will display only Error, Warning, and Information event messages.
Known File Types

Known File Types dialog box
You may specify which Known File Types will be enabled/?disabled by default. You may also specify know
file types to search for during a specific scan session on the Scan dialog box.

Known File Types

Click this button to reset the settings to the previous state. Active until the Apply
Reset
button is clicked.
Select All Click this button to select all file types in the list.
Clear All Click this button to clear all file types in the list except some predefined ones.
Reload User's File Click this button to apply new file types after the user's file types file has been
Types changes from the Main tab.
Edit User's File Click this button to add a new customer's Known File Type, or to edit already
Types existing ones. See the Customizing File Types help page for more details.
Bad Sectors
Bad Sectors dialog box
Bad Sectors settings

Specifies a default value for I/O Tries, or how many times R-Studio will try to
read a bad sector. You may specify this parameter for each drive separately
on the Properties tab.
R-Studio treats bad sectors in the following way:
It reads a certain part of disk (predefined by Windows) and
· If Default read attempts is set to 0, the entire part with bad sectors will be
filled with the specified pattern.
Default read attempts
· If Default read attempts is set to a non-zero value, R-Studio reads again that
part sector by sector, repeating the attempts the specified number of times.
If R-Studio still cannot read a bad sector, it fills the sectors with the
specified pattern. In this case only the bad sectors will be filled with the
pattern, but that extremely slows the disk read process.
For example, if you set Default read attempts to 1, a bad sector will be read 2
times.
Set for all drives Click this button to reset I/O Tries for all drives to the default value.
Specifies a default pattern R-Studio will use to fill bad sectors in files to
Pattern to fill bad blocks
recover, in images, or when showing data in the Text/?hexadecimal editor.

17 R-Studio Manual
You may specify the pattern either in the ANSI or Hex data format.
Note: R-Studio will never ever try to write anything on the disk from which
data is to recover or an image is to create.
Memory Usage
Memory Usage dialog box
These settings control how much memory R-Studio uses for its work. They help preventing R-Studio from
locking when trying to perform very memory-consuming tasks like scanning large disks or processing file
systems with a lot of files.
Memory Usage settings
Disable memory control If this option is selected, the memory control is disabled.
If this option is selected, R-Studio will automatically stop performing the task
Automatic when the amount of used memory reaches the specified value. You may
specify the limit for either the virtual or physical memory.
You may see how much memory R-Studio actually uses on the Memory Usage dialog box.
II Data Recovery Using R-Studio

Many specific data recovery cases are discussed in the R-TT's Data Recovery Guide.
Depending on the situation, data recovery may vary:
1. Recovery of deleted files that have resided on an existing logical disk
This can be done using Basic File Recovery.
2. Recovery of files that have resided on a data disk with a damaged file system, or on a previously
deleted or re-formatted partition
If the file system on such logical disk is damaged, the operating system sees that logical disk as a partition
without a valid file system. Such partition should be previously scanned. Also, it should be scanned if you
want to recover data on a previously deleted or re-formatted partition.
When the partition is scanned, a number of recognized partitions will appear. R-Studio shows them in
different colors depending on which elements of the partition have been found.
An existing logical disk or partition

Data Recovery Using R-Studio 18
Both boot records and file entries are found for this partition
Only file entries are found for this partition
Only boot records are found for this partition
Empty space on the object
Files that have been found using scan for known file types (raw file search).
Although such recognized partitions are virtual objects, files can be searched for and recovered from
recognized partitions as from real logical disks using Basic File Recovery.
To successfully recover files from a recognized partition, it is necessary to find a right one which corresponds
to the real logical disk on which the files resided. No strict rules can be applied to that, but the following
considerations should be taken into account:
· If you are going to recover files from a disk with a damaged file system, most likely the right recognized
partition will be a green one.
· If you are going to recover files from a previously deleted or re-formatted partition, most likely the
right recognized partition will be a yellow one.
Also always check the recognized partition's file system, start point, and size. They should be the same for
the recognized partition and real logical disk/?partition. When in doubt, try to preview a couple of files from
the recognized partition. If the files are seen correctly, this is the right partition.
3. Data recovery from a damaged system disk. The computer does not start up.
· If this computer is on a network, create an R-Studio Agent Emergency startup disk for the computer,
install R-Studio on another computer on the network, and recover data over network.
· If this computer is stand-alone, create an R-Studio Emergency startup disk and use it to start up the
computer and recover data. You may use external USB hard disks to store recovered files.
R-Studio Features
Basic File Recovery
Mass File Recovery
Text/?hexadecimal editor
R-Studio Emergency
2.1 Basic File Recovery
NEVER TRY TO SAVE RECOVERED FILES/? FOLDERS TO THE SAME LOGICAL DISK WHERE
THEY RESIDE!!!
Or you may obtain unpredictable results and lose all of your data.
See the Data Recovery Issues topic for details.
Basic file recovery can be made for deleted files that has resided on an existing logical disk visible to the
operating system. In all other cases, Advanced Data Recovery is required.

19 R-Studio Manual
To recover deleted files from a logical disk (recognized partition),

1 Double-click a logical disk on the R-Studio's Drives panel to enumerate files on the disk
Other ways to enumerate files
· Select the disk and click the Open Drive Files button,
or
· Right-click the selected disk and select Open Drive Files on the shortcut menu,
or
· Select the disk and press the F5 key.
or
· Select Open Drive Files on the Drive menu
If you try to enumerate files on a hard drive or another object without a valid file system on it, a Double-click
a logical disk... message will appear. Select a logical disk on the object or scan the object.
> R-Studio will change its panel showing the disk's folders/?files structure
R-Studio analyzes data on the object and displays all files for which records have been found in the analyzed
tables. If files have not been found, that means that their records have been deleted. To find such files,
Advanced Data Recovery is required.
Please note that R-Studio shows only those files/?folders that match a specified file mask .
R-Studio Main panel
Panel view options

You may set which panels and bars to enable/?disable. To enable/?disable

The Toolbar Select/?clear Toolbar on the View menu

The Status bar Select/?clear Status bar on the View menu
The Folders panel Select/?clear Folders View on the View menu
The Files panel Select/?clear Contents View on the View menu
The Log panel Select/?clear Event Log on the View menu
The Find Results panel Select/?clear Find Results on the View menu
You may also arrange the data as required. On the View menu, select Arrange and them a required
arrangement.
You may specify which columns will be visible on the Files panel. On the View menu, select Contents
Columns, and select the columns you want to see.
Files can be shown as a list or as icons/?tiles of different sizes.
Files shown as icons/?
tiles
Recovery chances
R-Studio shows its estimates of chances for successful file recovery in the Rec column.
File Information
You may view some information about a file. Right-click the file and select Get Info on the context menu.
File Information
Recovery chances
R-Studio Technician shows much more information about a file. See the Information about a File topic for
more details.

21 R-Studio Manual
Folders panel
Deleted folder
Marked folder (all child
objects in this folder are
marked)
Partially marked folder
(some child objects in this
folder are marked)
Target of a symlinked folder
Symlink to a folder
Cross-linked folder (A FAT
folder containing data which
also belongs to other FAT
folders.)
Questionable cross-linked
deleted folder (A FAT folder
found by R-Studio, but with
apparently invalid content.)
Files panel:
Deleted file:
Marked deleted file

Selected deleted file
Target of a hard link
Hard link to a file
You may also arrange the data as required: by their extensions, creation/?
m odification time, or as a real file structure
See Find and Mark Multiple Files for more details

Find Results panel

Select Drive
Click this button to return to the R-Studio main panel to select another drive.
Reopen Drive Files
Click this button to list files again.
Recover
Click this button to recover selected folders/?
files.
Recover Marked
Click this button to recover marked folders/?
files.
Find
Click this button to find or/and mark a particular file/?
folder.
Find Next
Click this button to find the next object specified in the Find/?
Mark dialog box
Find Previous
Click this button to find the previous object specified in the Find/?
Mark dialog box.
File Mask
Click this button to specify a file mask.
Stop
Click this button to stop the current operation.
Up
Click this button to move highlighting one folder up.
The Log panel will show how many files and folders are on the object, and their size. You may specify which
events will be shown in the log pane by setting a log filter.
Note: Metafiles are the file system's internal files invisible to any user, or file system data, which R-Studio
represents as files. These files do not contain user data directly. Unless you want to scrutinize a disk file
system, do not restore them.
If the Too many files... message appears, you may temporally stop file listing and browse through found files.
Then you can resume file listing. You also may skip this file topic and continue. R-Studio will keep
information about the entire file structure.
You may also copy the information about folders and files.
For the folder (the Folders pane):
Click Copy Folder: To copy the folder's name
Click Copy Path: To copy the path to the folder
For the file (the Contents pane):

23 R-Studio Manual
Click Copy (Column To copy the file's Name , Size , Created, etc., depending on which column is
Name): selected
Click Copy Path: To copy the file path.
Click Copy Selected To copy all the columns of the selected file.
Text:
2 Select a file/?
folder to recover
?
You may select several files/?folders in the same parent folder by pressing the Shift button and clicking the
objects simultaneously.
Marking multiple files/?
folders from different parent folders manually:
Mark a file/folder to recover by clicking the box left to the object, or select Mark on the shortcut menu.
You may mark several files/folders in different parent folders. You may mark all objects in the folder by
selecting Mark All on the Tools or shortcut menu. To unmark an object, click the box left to the object
once more or select Unmark on the shortcut menu. You may unmark all objects in the folder by selecting
Unmark All on the Tools or shortcut menu.
The Log panel will show how many files and folders you have marked, and their total size.
R-Studio can search for a particular file. Go to the Searching for a File topic for details. If you need to find
and mark many files, go to the Find and Mark Multiple Files topic for details.
File content may be previewed before recovery. Go to the Previewing Files topic for details.
If you do not find files that you want to recover:
Sometimes R-Studio can find the files but not the entire file paths to them. It puts such files into the Extra
Found Files folder. Try to search for the files there. If that does not help, try to find them by using file search
globally on the entire disk. Go to the Searching for a File topic for details
If you still cannot find files that you want to recover but are sure they have existed on the logical disk, you
need to use Advanced Data Recovery to find them.
3 Click the Recover or Recover Marked button
Other ways to recover selected files
· Right-click the selected file/?folder and select Recover or Recover Marked on the shortcut menu,
or
· Select Recover or Recover Marked on the File menu
or
· Press the F2 button.
4 Specify recover options and output folder on the Recover dialog box and click the OK button
Recover dialog box

If you have another computer connected to R-Studio over network, the Recover dialog box will be slightly
different. See Data recovery over network for details.
Recover options
Condense successful restoration events If this check box is selected, R-Studio will display only error and
warning messages in its Log
Restore folder structure If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers the entire path to
the selected object.
Restore from root If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers the entire path to
the selected object starting from the root folder of the disk.
Recover metafiles If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers disk metafiles.
Metafiles are the file system's internal files invisible to any user, or
file system data, which R-Studio represents as files. These files do
not contain user data directly. Unless you want to scrutinize a disk
file system, do not restore them.
Recover alternative data streams If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers alternative data
streams for file systems that support them. Has no effect on FAT
files. See Extended Information Recovery for the NTFS file
system, and Data Recovery on HFS/?HFS+ File System for the
Mac computers.
Recover security If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers security attributes
for NTFS files. Has no effect on FAT files. See Extended
Information Recovery for details.
Recover extended attributes If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers extended
(HPFS) file attributes.
Recover real folders structure Enabled when the files are sorted by their extensions or date. See
Find and Mark Multiple Files for details. If this check box is
selected, R-Studio recovers the real folders/?files structure on the
disk rather than that of sorted files.
Skip files with bad sectors If this check box is selected, R-Studio skips files with bad sectors
and displays their list on the Files with bad sectors dialog box
when the recovery has been completed. You may separately
decide later what to do with those files. See Bad sectors for
details.
If this check box is cleared, R-Studio tries to read those sectors
several times (specified on the Settings/?Bad Sectors dialog
box), and, if fails, fills bad sectors in the recovered file with the
pattern specified on the same box. Information about such files will
appear in the Log.
Do not recover duplicate files from If this check box is selected, R-Studio does not recover files from
Extra Found Files Extra Found Files (raw files) that coincide with files recovered
from the file system.
Ignore file mask If this check box is selected, R-Studio recovers all content of a
selected folder, ignoring a specified File Mask.

25 R-Studio Manual
Advanced Specifies options for mass file recovery

If you want to recover multiple files at once, go to the Recover Multiple Files for more information
THEY RESIDE!!!
If a file to be recovered appears to have an invalid name, a Broken File Name dialog box will appear. You
may correct the name and resume file recovery.
Broken File Name dialog box
Broken File Name properties

File name Shows the current incorrect file name.
New name Field for a new file name.
Edit broken symbols only If this check box is selected, only invalid symbols may be
corrected
Change all invalid symbols to If this check box is selected, all invalid symbols will be changed to
the specified symbol
Buttons
Rename Click to resume file recovery
Rename All Click to resume file recovery. All other files will be renamed
according to the specified rule.
Skip Click to skip this file
Skip All Click to skip all files and stop file recovery
If there is no space available for the recovered files, the There is not enough space on the disk dialog box
will appear. You may either select other place to store the files, skip that particular file or abort the recovery
process.
There is not enough space on the disk dialog box
> R-Studio will recover the selected/?marked files/?folders to the specified folder and show the results in
the Log pane
The Recovery progress indicator will show the log and progress of recovery process.
Recovery progress indicator

Note: R-Studio recovers files from Ext2/3/4FS partitions, but writes it to FAT or NTFS local disks. Or you
may write such files to network disks. R-Studio successfully recovers files from Ext2/3/4FS partitions except
its security attributes. R-Studio recovers symlinks as files containing the path to files which symlinks point
to.
See Data Recovery on HFS/?HFS+ file system for details on recovering data from disks with the
HFS/HFS+ file system
Finding Previous File Versions
Previewing Files
File Masks
Regular Expressions
Event Log
2.1.1 Searching for a File
R-Studio can find a particular file, if it is difficult to find it manually on the Folders or Files panel. You can also
automatically mark/?unmark all found files.
To search for a file,
1 Click the Find button
Other ways to search for the file
· Right-click a folder and select Find on the shortcut menu,
or
· Select a folder and select Find on the Tools menu
2 Specify a file to be found and its options on the Find dialog box, and click the OK button
Note that a File Mask may be applied.
Find/?
Mark (Main) dialog box
Find/?
M ark options
You may specify how to treat specified strings. Please note that R-Studio stores previously entered search
strings.
Files If this option is selected, R-Studio treats specified strings as file names. Use ? for one
unspecified character and * for an unlimited number of them to specify file masks.

27 R-Studio Manual
File Extensions If this option is selected, R-Studio treats specified strings as file extensions
Regular If this option is selected, R-Studio treats specified strings as regular expressions
Expressions
All Files If this option is selected, R-Studio applies Advanced Options to all files.
Match case If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a case-sensitive search
Look at
Files If this check box is selected, R-Studio includes files into a search.
Folders If this check box is selected, R-Studio includes folders into a search. Disables when
the Mark/Unmark All option is selected.
Deleted files If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a search among deleted files/?folders.
Existing files If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a search among existing files/?folders.
Look in Specifies where R-Studio searches for, and marks, files. It can look for them on the
Entire disk, or in/from a certain folder.
You may specify the starting folder for the search.
identifies current opened folder.

identifies current starting folder for the search.
sets starting folder to the current opened folder.
sets back current starting folder.
Advanced options If this check box is selected, R-Studio will use the advanced options.
Size from/up to Specifies file size limits. See the Data Formats and Multipliers topic for more details
on data formats.
File Id Specifies File Id that R-Studio assigns to a file.
Recovery Specifies files with certain recovery chances.
Chances
Date Specifies file date boundaries. Dates for Modified, Created, and Last Accessed
timestamps may be set separately.
The Set for all button sets the specified data for all fields.
Find/?Mark options Specify what R-Studio does with the found files.
The Find first/previous/next/last options. R-Studio stops at the first/previous/next/last file
that matches the specified search criteria.
Find all files. R-Studio searches for all files that matches the specified search criteria..
The search results appear on the Find Results panel.
Mark/Unmark All. R-Studio marks/unmarks all files that match the search criteria. When
these options are selected, R-Studio marks/unmarks files only, not folders, regardless
of what Look at: Folders specifies.

Please note, that when performing a new find and mark/?unmark task, R-Studio does
not takes into consideration the previous marked/?unmarked state of files. For example,
if you first mark all doc files, and then all txt files, all doc files remain marked, too. To
unmark them, you should specify doc once again and select Unmark files.
> R-Studio will show/?mark the found file(s)
If you need to find and mark many files, go to the Find and Mark Multiple Files topic for details.
To repeat the search,
* Click the Find Next or Find Previous buttons
Other ways to repeat the search
· Right-click a folder and select Find Next or Find Previous on the shortcut menu
or
· Select a folder and select Find Next or Find Previous on the Tools menu
To find all files and show them on the Find Results panel,
* Select Find all on the on the Find dialog box,
or
select Find all on the Tools menu
> R-Studio will show the found files on the Find Results panel
You may do the following actions on the found files:
Recover, Mark, Preview
by right-clicking the found file and selecting the appropriate item in the shortcut menu.
2.1.2 Finding Previous File Versions
R-Studio can find previous versions of files. It searches for them in the file's current folder and in Extra Found
Files.
File versions are searched for using file size. If the size of a files is within 10% of the original filesize, the following
conditions are checked:
Conditions Legend
File name N
File extension E
Recognized file type T
To search for previous file versions,

1 Right-click the file and select Find Previous Versions of the File on the shortcut menu
* R-Studio will show the files in the list:
File versions
This technique can be used to find deleted original files after attacks of file encrypting viruses.
29 R-Studio Manual
2.1.3 Previewing Files

R-Studio has a built-in file previewer that allows you to preview both existing and deleted files. You may use this
feature to estimate chances for successful file recovery or to find a file to recover.
To preview a file
1 Right-click a file to preview on the Files panel and select Preview on the shortcut menu
Other ways to preview the file
· Select the file on the Files panel and click the Preview button,
or
· Select the file on the Files panel and select Preview on the File menu
> R-Studio will show the content of the file
If you have several files open in the previewer, you may instantly close all of them by selecting Close All
Previews on the File menu.
File Previewer for Pictures:

Pictures can be previewed either as tiles within the main window of R-Studio or in an external previewer.
Within the main window as tiles:
Tile size can be changed..
Pictures as tiles
In the external viewer:

Picture files can be zoomed in/out.

Picture file previewer
File Previewer for Video and Audio files:

Video and audio files can be played even without their respective application installed.
Video file previewer
File Previewer for Microsoft/?

Open/?
Libre Office Documents:
Documents can be shown (including embedded pictures) even without their respective applications installed.
They can be zoomed in/out for better viewing.

31 R-Studio Manual
Microsoft/?
Open/?
Libre Office document previewer
File Previewer for Adobe Acrobat PDF Files:

Files can be shown even without Adobe Acrobat installed.
The previewer allows the users to jump to a required page, zoom the document, and search for a required text.
Adobe Acrobat pdf document previewer
The files can be shown in different layouts and rotated. Click the View menu and select the required options.
Supported File Types:
Documents:
MS Office and Open/?Libre Office files, even without the programs installed:
· Word/?Writer documents: docx;
· Excel/?Calc spreadsheets: xlsx;
· PowerPoint presentation: pptx.
Office 97-2003, without the program installed:

· Word documents: doc;
· Excel spreadsheets xls;
· PowerPoint presentation ppt.

Adobe Acrobat document: pdf.
Multimedia Files
Video formats:
AIFF, ASF, AVI, BFI, CAF, FLV, GIF, GXF, HLS, QuickTime, 3GP, MP4, Matroska, Maxis XA,
MPEG-DASH, MPEG program stream, MPEG transport stream (including AVCHD), MXF, Material
eXchange Format, SMPTE, MSN Webcam stream, NUT, Ogg, OMA, RL2, TXD, WTV.
Audio formats:
8SVX, AAC, AAC+, AC-3, ADPCM, AMR-NB, AMR-WB, Amazing Studio PAF Audio, Apple
lossless audio, QuickTime, ATRAC, CELT, DCA (DTS Coherent Acoustics), DPCM, DSD (Direct
Stream Digitial), DSP Group TrueSpeech, DST (Direct Stream Transfer), DV audio, FLAC (Free Lossless
Audio Codec), G.723.1, G.729, GSM, IAC (Indeo Audio Coder), iLBC (Internet Low Bitrate Codec),
IMC (Intel Music Coder), Interplay ACM, MACE (Macintosh Audio Compression/?Expansion), MACE
(Macintosh Audio Compression/?Expansion), MLP (Meridian Lossless Packing), Monkey’s Audio, MP1
(MPEG audio layer 1), MP2 (MPEG audio layer 2), MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3), MPEG-4 Audio
Lossless Coding (ALS), Musepack SV7/SV8, Nellymoser Asao, AVC (Audio for Video Codec), PCM
A-law/?mu-law, QCELP/?PureVoice, QDesign Music Codec, RealAudio, Vorbis, Voxware MetaSound,
WavPack, Westwood Audio, Windows Media Audio, Xbox Media Audio
Graphic files (with file extensions)

3DS Max thumbnail (max), AAA logo (bpr), ACE texture (ace), ADEX (img, rle), AIM Grey Scale (ima,
im), AIPD image (aipd), ARF (arf), AT&T Group 4 (att), AT&T multigen (icn), AVHRR Image (sst), AVT
RAW (raw), AWD (awd), Ability Photopaint Image (apx), Access (g4, acc), Aces200 (ace), Acorn Sprite
(acorn), AdTech perfectfax (adt), Adobe Illustrator (ai), Adobe PhotoParade(images) (php), Adobe
Photoshop (psd), Advanced Art Studio (ocp, art, pic), AirNav (anv), Album bébé (frm), Alias Image File
(pix, als, alias), Alpha Microsystems BMP (bmp), Amapi (2d), Amica Paint (ami, [b]), Amiga IFF (iff, blk),
Amiga icon (info), Amstrad Cpc Screen (cpc), Analyze (avw), Analyze-7 (img), Andrew Toolkit raster
object (atk), Apollo HDRU (hdru, hdr, gn), ArcInfo Binary (hdr), Art Director (art), Artisan (art), Artist 64
(a64), Artrage (ptg), Artweaver Document (awd), Astronomical Research Network (arn), Atari grafik
(pcp), Aurora (sim), Auto F/X (afx), AutoCAD DWG (dwg, dwt), AutoCAD DXF (dxf), Autocad CAD-
Camera (img), Autodesk Animator (fli, flc), Autodesk QuickCAD thumbnail (cad), Autodesk SKETCH
thumbnail (skf), Autodesk SketchUp component (skp, skb), Autologic (gm, gm2, gm4), Award Bios Logo
(epa), Axialis Screensaver(images) (ssp), B3D(images) (b3d), BFLI (bfl, bfli, fli, flp, afl), BIAS
FringeProcessor (msk, img, raw, flt), BLP textures (blp), BMF (bmf), BSB/KAP (kap), BYU SIR (sir),
Bert's Coloring (bmg, ibg), Bfx Bitware (bfx), Bio-Rad confocal (pic), Blazing Paddles (pi), Bob Raytracer
(bob), Brender (pix), Brooktrout 301 (brk, 301, brt), Brother Fax (uni), Buttonz & Tilez texture (til),
CALS Raster (cal, cals, gp4, mil), CDU Paint (cdu), CGM (cgm), CImage (dsi), CMU Window Manager
(cmu), CP8 256 Gray Scale (cp8), CSV (csv), Calamus (cpi, crg), Camera RAW (raw), Canon EOS-1D
Mark II RAW (cr2), Canon Navigator Fax (can), Canon PowerShot (crw), Cartes Michelin (big), Casio
QV-10/100 Camera (cam), Casio RAW (bay, raw), Chinon ES-1000 digital camera (cmt), Cisco IP
Phone (cip), Cloe Ray-Tracer (clo, cloe), ColoRIX (rix, sci, scx, sc?), CompW (wlm), CompuServe GIF

33 R-Studio Manual
(gif, giff), Computer Eyes, Digital Vision (ce), ComputerEyes Raw (ce1, ce2), Contax RAW (bay, raw),
Core IDC (idc), Corel Draw Bitmap(preview) (cdr), Corel Draw Pattern(preview) (pat), Corel
Flow(preview) (bmf), Corel Metafile Exchange(preview) (cmx), Corel PhotoPaint 6.0 (cpt),
CoverDesigner(images) (ncd), CoverDesigner Template(images) (nct), Crayola (art), Creative PC-CAM
RAW (bay, raw), DBW Render (), DIV Game Studio Map (map), DIV Game Studio Multi Map (fpg),
DKB Ray-Tracer (dis), DNG (dng), DPX (dpx), Dali Raw (sd0, sd1, sd2), Datacopy (img), Degas &
Degas Elite (pi1, pc1, pi2, pc2, pi3, pc3, pi4, pi5, pi6), Deluxe Paint, Electronic Arts (lbm, ilbm), Dicom
(dcm, acr, dic, dicom, dc3), Digital F/X (tdim), Digital Research(GEM Paint) (img, gem), Direct Draw
Surface (dds), Discorp CMP Image (cmp), DjVu (djvu, djv, iw4), DolphinEd (dol), Doodle Atari (doo),
Doodle C64 (dd), Doodle C64(Compressed) (jj), Dr Halo (cut), Draz Paint (drz), EA Sports FSH (fsh),
EPS Interchange Format (epi, ept), ERI-chan(Entis Rasterized Image) (eri), ESM Software Pix (pix), Ecchi
(ecc), Eclipse (tile), Edmics (c4), Egg Paint (trp), Electric Image (ei, eidi), Embroidery (bmc), Encapsulated
Postscript (ps, eps), Encapsulated Postscript (Preview) (eps), Enhance Simplex (esm), Enhanced
Compressed Wavelet (ecw), Epson RAW (erf), Eroiica (eif), Everex Everfax (efx, ef3), Explore(TDI) &
Maya (iff, tdi), FIF(Iterated System) (fif), FIT (fit), Face Painter (fpt), Fast Piecewise-constant (pwc), Fax
Group 3 (g3, fax), Fax man (fmf), Faxable PCX (fcx), Faxable TIFF (ftf), Fenix Map (map), Fenix Multi
Map (fpg), FileMagic (mag), Flash Image (fi), FlashCam Frame (ncy), FlashPix Format (fpx), Flexible
Image Transport System (fts, fits, fit), Foculus RAW (bay, raw), Fontasy Grafik (bsg), Fremont Fax96
(f96), Fugawi Map (fx3), Fuji S2 RAW (raf), Fun Painter II (fp2, fun), Fun Photor (fpr), Fuzzy bitmap
(fbm, cbm), GRS16 (g16), Gamma Fax (gmf), GeoPaint (geo), Gfa Raytrace (sul), GigaPaint Hi-res (gih),
GigaPaint Multi (gig), Gimp Bitmap (xcf), Gimp Brush (gbr), Gimp Icon (ico), Gimp Pattern (pat), GoDot
(4bt, 4bit, clp), GunPaint (gun, ifl), HD Photo (wdp, hdp), HDRI (hdr, hdri), HF (hf), HP-48/49 GROB
(gro, grb), HP-49 OpenFire (gro2, gro4), HPGL-2 (hp, hpg, hgl, plt, hpgl, hpgl2, gl2, prn, prt, spl), HRU
(hru), HSI Raw (raw), Half-Life Model (mdl), Hasselblad RAW (3fr), Hayes JTFax (jtf), Hemera Photo
Image (hpi), Hemera Thumbs (hta), Heretic II MipMap (m8), Hi-Eddi (hed), Hires C64 (hir, hbm),
Homeworld Texture (lif), IBM Kips (kps), IBM Printer Page Segment (pse), IM5(Visilog) (im5), IMNET
Image (imt), IOCA (ica, ioca, mod), IPLab (ipl), IPod thumb (ithmb), ISS (iss), IcoFX (ifx), Icon Library
(icl), Imacon/?Hasselblad RAW (fff), Image Capture Board (icb), Image Magick file (mif, miff), Image
Speeder (ish), Image System(Hires) (ish), Image System(Multicolor) (ism), Image Systems RLC2 Graphic
(rlc), ImageLab (b&w, b_w), ImagePro Sequence (seq), Imaging Fax (g3n), Imaging Technology (img),
Img Software Set (img), Inshape (iim), InterPaint(Hires) (iph), InterPaint(Multicolor) (ipt), Intergraph
Format (itg, cit, rle), Interleaf (iimg), Iris CT (ct), Iris Graphics (iris), J Wavelet Image Codec (wic), JBIG
(jbg, bie, jbig), JBIG-2 (jb2), JFIF based file (jb2), JPEG/?JFIF (jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif, J, jpe), JPEG 8BIM
header(Mac) (jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif, J, jpe), JPEG XR (jxr), JPEG-2000 Code Stream (jpc), JPEG-2000 JP2
File Format (jp2, j2k, jpx, jpf), JPEG-LS (jls), Jeff's Image Format (jif), Jigsaw (jig), Jovian VI (vi), Jpeg
Network Graphics (jng), JustButtons animated bitmap (btn), KONTRON (img), Khoros Visualization
Image file (vif, viff, xv), KinuPix Skin (thb), Kiss Cel (cel), Koala Paint (koa, kla), Koala
Paint(Compressed) (gg), Kodak Cineon (cin), Kodak DC120 Digital Camera (kdc), Kodak DC25
Camera (k25), Kodak Photo CD (pcd), Kodak Pro Digital RAW (dcr), Kofax Group 4 (kfx), Kolor Raw
Format (kro), Konica Camera File (kqp), LSS16 (lss, 16), LView Pro (lvp), LaserData (lda), Leaf RAW
(mos), Leica RAW (bay, raw), Light Work Image (lwi), LucasFilm Format (lff), Lumena CEL (cel),
LuraDocument Format (ldf), LuraDocument.jpm Format (jpm), LuraWave Format (lwf), LuraWave JPEG-
2000 Code Stream (jpc), LuraWave JPEG-2000 Format (jp2, j2k, jpx, jpf), MAKIchan Graphics (mag),
MGI Photosuite Project(images) (pzp), MGR bitmap (mgr), MRC(Medical Research Council) (mrc),
MTV Ray-Tracer (mtv), Mac Paint (mac, mpnt, macp, pntg, pnt, paint), Mac icon (icns), Macintosh
Quickdraw/?Pict (pic, pict, pict2, pct), Mac OSX Resource (rsc, rsrc), Maggi Hairstyles & Cosmetics (fff),
Male MRI (pd, t1, t2), Male Normal CT (fre), Mamiya RAW (mef), Marks Russel File (mrf), Mavica
(411), Maw-Ware Textures (mtx), Mayura Draw (pdx), MegaPaint (bld), Megalux Frame (frm), Micro
Dynamics MARS (pbt), Micro Illustrator Uncompressed (mil), Micrografx Picture Publisher 4.0 (pp4),
Micrografx Picture Publisher 5.0 (pp5), Micron RAW (bay, raw), Microsoft Image Composer (mic),
Microsoft Paint (msp), Microtek Eyestar (img), Mindjongg Format (ipg), Minolta DiMAGE RAW (mrw),
Mobile FAX (rfa), MonkeyCard (pdb), MonkeyLogo (pdb), MonkeyPhoto (mph), MrSid (sid), Msx 2
Screen (sc2), Multiple Network Graphics (mng), NCR Image (ncr), NIST ihdr (pct), National Imagery
Transmission F. (ntf, nitf), NeoBook Cartoon (car), Neochrome(ST & TT) (neo), Neopaint Mask (npm),
Neopaint Stamp (stw), NewsRoom (nsr, ph, bn), Nifti (img), Nikon RAW (nef), Nokia Group Graphics
(ngg), Nokia Logo File (nlm), Nokia OTA bitmap (otb), Nokia Operator Logo (nol), OAZ Fax (oaz, xfx),
OS/2 Bitmap (bmp, bga), Olicom Fax (ofx), Olympus RAW (orf), Open Image Library Format (oil),
OpenEXR (exr), Optigraphics (ctf), Optigraphics Tiled (ttf), Optocat (abs), Oric Hires (hir), Oric TAP
(tap), OS/2 Warp (bga), PABX background (pix), PAX (pax), PC Paint/?Pictor Page (pic, clp), PCO
(b16), PM (pm), Page Control Language (pcl), Paint Magic (pmg), PaintShopPro Browser Cache File
(jbf), PaintShopPro Brush (pspbrush), PaintShopPro Brush (jbr), PaintShopPro Frame (pfr, pspframe),
PaintShopPro Image (psp, pspimage), PaintShopPro Mask (pspmask), PaintShopPro Mask (msk),
PaintShopPro Pattern (pat), PaintShopPro Picture Tube (tub, psptube), PaintShopPro Texture (tex), Palm
Pilot (pdb), Panasonic DMC-LC1 RAW (srf), Panasonic LX3 RAW (rw2), Panasonic RAW (bay, raw),
Pegs (pxs, pxa), Pentax *ist D (pef), Pfs Art Publisher (art), Photo Deluxe (pdd, pdb), Photo Filtre Studio
(pfi), PhotoFantasy Image (fsy), PhotoFrame (frm), PhotoStudio File (psf), PhotoStudio Stamp (stm),
Photomatrix (cat), Pic2 (p2), Picasso 64 (p64), Picture Gear Pocket (prc), Picture It! (mix), Pixar picture
file (pic, pxr, picio, pixar), Pixel Power Collage (ib7, i17, i18, if9), Pixia (pxa), Pixibox (pxb), Planetary
Data System (pds, img), Playback Bitmap Sequence (bms), Pocket PC Bitmap (2bp), Pocket PC
Themes(images) (tsk), Polychrome Recursive Format (prf), Portable Bitmap (pbm, rpbm, ppma), Portable
Document Format (pdf), Portable Greyscale (pgm, rpgm), Portable Image (pnm, rpnm, pbm, rpbm, pgm,
rpgm, ppm, rppm), Portable Network Graphics (png, apng), Portable Pixmap (ppm, rppm), Portfolio
Graphics (pgf), Portfolio Graphics Compressed (pgc), Portrait (cvp), Poser Bump (bum), Postscript (ps,
ps1, ps2, ps3, eps, prn), PowerCard maker (crd), PowerPoint(images) (pps), PowerPoint
Presentation(images) (ppt), Print Master (pm), Print Shop (psa, psb), Printfox/?Pagefox (bs, pg, gb), Prism
(cpa), Prisms (pri), Psion Series 3 Bitmap (pic), Psion Series 5 Bitmap (mbm), Punk Productions Picture
(ppp), Puzzle (pzl), Q0 (q0, rgb), Qdv(Random Dot Software) (qdv), Qrt Ray-Tracer (qrt), Quake
Texture (wal), Quantel VPB (vpb), QuickTime Image Format (qtif, qti), RAW DVR (raw), RIPTerm
Image (icn), Radiance (rad, img, pic), Rainbow Painter (rp), Raw (raw, gry, grey), Rawzor (rwz),
Rayshade (pic), Red Storm File Format (rsb), Ricoh Digital Camera (j6i), Ricoh Fax (001, ric), Ricoh IS30
(pig), Rm2K XYZ (xyz), Rollei RAW (rdc, ia), RoverShot RAW (bay, raw), RunPaint(Multicolor) (rpm),
Saracen Paint (sar), SBIG CCD camera ST-4 (st4), SBIG CCD camera ST-X (stx, st4, st5, st6, st7, st8),
SciFax (sci), SciTex Continuous Tone (sct, ct, ch), Seattle Film Works (sfw), Seattle Film Works multi-
image (pwp, sfw), SecretPhotos puzzle (xp0), Sega SJ-1 DIGIO (sj1), Sharp GPB (img), Siemens Mobile
(bmx), SIF MICHEL-Soft (sif), Sigma RAW (x3f), Silicon Graphics RGB (rgb, rgba, bw, iris, sgi, int, inta),
Sinar RAW (cs1, sti), Skantek (skn), Slow Scan Television (hrz), SmartDraw 6 template (sdt), SmartFax
(1), SmoothMove Pan Viewer (pan), Softimage (pic, si), Solitaire Image Recorder (sir), Sony DSC-F1
Cyber-shot (pmp), Sony DSC-F828 RAW (srf), Sony PS2 TIM (tm2), Sony Playstation TIM (tim), Sony
RAW (sr2, arw), Spectrum 512 (spu), Spectrum 512(Compressed) (spc), Spectrum 512(Smooshed)
(sps), SPOT (dat), SriSun (ssi), Stad (pic, pac, seq), Star Office Gallery (sdg), Starbase (img), Stardent

35 R-Studio Manual
AVS X (x, avs, mbfs, mbfavs), Starlight Xpress SX (RAW), Stereo Image (jps), ST Micro RAW (bay,
raw), Structured Fax Format (sff), Sun Icon/?Cursor (icon, cursor, ico, pr), Sun Rasterfile (ras, rast, sun, sr,
scr, rs), Sun TAAC file (iff, vff, suniff, taac), Syberia texture (syj), Synthetic Universe (syn, synu), SVG
(svg), TG4 (tg4), TI Bitmap (92i, 73i, 82i, 83i, 85i, 86i, 89i), TIFF Revision 6 (tif, tim, tiff), TMSat image
(imi), TRS 80 (hr), TealPaint (pdb), Teli Fax (mh), Thumbnail (tnl), TilePic (tjp), Tiny (tny, tn1, tn2, tn3),
TopDesign Thumbnail (b3d, b2d), Total Annihilation (gaf), Truevision Targa (tga, targa, pix, bpx, ivb),
Ulead Pattern (pst), Ulead PhotoImpact (upi), Ulead Texture(images) (pe4), Usenix FaceServer (fac, face),
Utah raster image (rle, urt), VIPS Image (v), VITec (vit), VRML2 (wrl), Venta Fax (vfx), Verity (vif),
Vicar (vic, vicar, img), Vidcom 64 (vid), Video Display Adapter (vda), Vista (vst), Vivid Ray-Tracer (img),
Vort (pix), Vue d'esprit (vob), WAD(Half life) (wad), WSQ (wsq), WaveL (iwc), Wavefront Raster file
(rla, rlb, rpf), WebShots(images) (wb1, wbc, wbp, wbz), Weekly Puzzle (jig), WebP (webp, wep),
Whypic (ypc), WinFAX (fxs, fxo, wfx, fxr, fxd, fxm), WinMIPS (pic), Windows & Aldus Metafile (wmf),
Windows Animated Cursor (ani), Windows Bitmap (bmp, rle, vga, rl4, rl8, sys), Windows Clipboard (clp),
Windows Comp. Enhanced Metafile (emz), Windows Compressed Metafile (wmz), Windows Cursor
(cur), Windows DIB (dib), Windows Enhanced Metafile (emf), Windows Icon (ico), Winzle Puzzle (wzl),
Wireless Bitmap(level 0) (wbmp, wbm, wap), Word Perfect Graphics(images) (wpg), Worldport Fax
(wfx), X Windows System dump (xwd, x11), X11 Bitmap (xbm, bm), X11 Pixmap (xpm, pm), XV Visual
Schnauzer (p7), Xara(images) (xar), Xerox DIFF (xif), Ximage (xim), Xionics SMP (smp), YUV 16Bits
(yuv, qtl, uyvy), YUV 16Bits Interleaved (yuv, qtl, uyvy), YUV 4:1:1 (yuv, qtl), YUV 4:2:2 (yuv, qtl), YUV
4:4:4 (yuv, qtl), ZX Spectrum Hobetta ($s, $c, !s), ZX Spectrum Snapshot(sna), ZX Spectrum standard
(screen scr), ZZ Rough (rgh), Zeiss BIVAS (dta), Zeiss LSM (lsm), Zoner Callisto Metafile(zmf), Zoner
Zebra Metafile (zbr), Zsoft Multi-page Paintbrush (dcx), Zsoft Publisher's Paintbrush (pcx, pcc, dcx),
byLight (bif)
2.1.4 File Masks
R-Studio shows only those files/?folders that match the specified file mask. File mask affects files/?folders that are
processed by the Recover and Find commands.
To specify a file mask,
1 Click the File Mask button
Other ways to specify the file mask
· Right-click a folder and select File Mask on the shortcut menu
or
· Select the folder and select File Mask on the Tools menu
2 Specify the file mask on the File mask dialog box and click the OK button
Mask dialog box

File mask options

You may specify options for All Files, File Extensions, Files, and Regular Expressions
Match case If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a case-sensitive search.
Show empty folders If this check box is selected, R-Studio will show folders with no files matching the
mask.
Deleted files If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a search among deleted files/?folders.
Existing files If this check box is selected, R-Studio makes a search among existing files/?folders.
Use advanced If this check box is selected, R-Studio will use the advanced options, even when
options they are hidden.
Advanced Options
Size from/up to Specifies file size limits. See the Data Formats and Multipliers topic for more
details on data formats.
Date Specifies file date boundaries. Dates for Modified, Created, and Last Accessed
timestamps may be set separately.
The Set for all button sets the specified data for all fields.
> R-Studio will show only those files that match the specified file masks
Mask presets
You may set various presets with different file masks. Just click on the Plus button to add the data from the dialog
box to the presets. You may also give presets names, delete them, and store them permanently.
2.1.5 Regular Expressions
Regular expression is a notation for patterns of text, as opposed to exact strings of characters. The notation uses
literal characters and metacharacters. Every character which does not have special meaning in the regular-
expression syntax is a literal character and matches an occurrence of that character. For example, letters and
numbers are literal characters. A metacharacter is a symbol with special meaning (an operator or delimiter) in the
regular-expression syntax.
. Wildcard: any character
* Repeat: zero or more occurrences of previous character or class
^ Line position: beginning of line
$ Line position: end of line
[class] Character class: any character in the set
[^class] Inverse class: any character not in the set
[x-y] Range: any characters within the specified range
\x Escape: literal use of metacharacter x
\<xyz Word position: beginning of the word
xyz\> Word position: end of the word
For example, the following regular expression .* matches any string of characters, â matches any string
beginning with character a.
2.1.6 Event Log
R-Studio logs and displays events in the Log panel. You may set a Log filter to display only needed information
and to write it to a log file. You may specify the log settings on the Settings dialog box.

37 R-Studio Manual
You may clear or save the log

To clear the log,
* Right-click the Log panel and select Clear Log on the shortcut menu.
To save the log to a file,
* Right-click the Log panel and select Save Log to File on the shortcut menu.
You may copy data from separate messages:

Click Copy (Column Name): To copy the record's Type, Date, Time, Text, depending on which column is
selected
Click Copy Selected Text: To copy all the columns of the selected record.
2.2 Advanced Data Recovery

This chapter explains how to perform advanced data recovery operations.
· Disk Scan
· Customizing File Types
· Customizing File Types-I
· Customizing File Types-II
· Regions
· Exclusive Regions
· Images
· Object Copy
2.2.1 Disk Scan
In order to completely analyze data structure on an object, it must be scanned. Any object on the Drives panel can be
scanned. In addition, you may create a region to scan only a part of an object. The Regions topic explains how to create and
work with regions. Scan is also greatly improves estimations for chances of successful file recovery.
You may select scan area and some other scan parameters. Scan information may be saved to a file and later this
file may be opened.
You may save scan information on the remote computer if necessary.
Attention: Scanning large areas may be a very lengthy process!
NEVER TRY TO SAVE SCAN INFORMATION TO THE OBJECT BEING SCANNED!!!
To scan an object
1 Select an object on the R-Studio's Drives panel
2 Click the Scan button
Other ways to start scan
· Right-click the selected disk and select Scan on the shortcut menu,
or
· Select Scan on the Drive menu

3 Specify the required parameters on the Scan dialog box and click the Scan button
Scan dialog box
Scan options
Disk Size: Shows the size of the object to be scanned
Start: Sets the start point of the area to be scanned.
Size: Sets the size of the area to be scanned.
Numbers in these fields can be in bytes or sectors. See the Data Formats and Multipliers topic for
more details on data formats.
File Systems: Specifies the file systems which objects are to be searched for.
Current version supports: FAT, NTFS, exFAT, ReFS, Ext2/3/4FS, HFS, APFS, and
UFS file systems.
Please note that if you need to scan an HFS, HFS+, or HFSX disk, always enable the
Extra search for Known File Types option. This is very important because when files are
being deleted on the HFS, HFS+, HFSX file systems, the computer completely
removes all system information on them, and there is no way to recover the deleted files
except by using the Extra Search for Known File Types option. See Data Recovery
on HFS/?HFS+ file system for details.
Extra search for Enables search for Known File Types.
Known File Types
Save scan Info to If this checkbox is selected, R-Studio will save scan information to a specified file.
File: Later this file may be opened. Please note, that this option does not save actual disk
data, only information on disk data structure gathered during disk scan.
If
Simple view If this option is selected, R-Studio will show only scan progress.
Detailed view If this option is selected, R-Studio will show graphic representation on objects found
during scan.
None If this option is selected, R-Studio will not show the Scan Information tab during
scan.
Buttons
Scan Starts scanning
Advanced Activates advanced scan options
Known File Selects file types that R-Studio will recognize during the disk scan.
Types...
Cancel Closes the dialog box

39 R-Studio Manual
NEVER TRY TO SAVE SCAN INFORMATION TO THE OBJECT BEING SCANNED!!!

If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Scan dialog box will have a
different look
and the Save Scan Information File dialog box will appear when you select a place to store scan info. You
may save it to the local or remote computer.
Known File Types (raw file search): While scanning, R-Studio can recognize the data’s particular file type.
Using such information, R-Studio can obtain more information about data/?file structure on the object being
scanned. By default, R-Studio tries to recognize the default list of supported file types specified on the
Known File Types tab of the Settings panel, greatly increasing time required for the scan. You may reduce it
by selecting only those file types that you need. Click the Known File Types... button and select the required
file types on the File Types dialog box. These selections will be applied to that scan session only.
R-Studio places such found files in the Raw Files section on the the Drives panel.
File Types dialog box

Known File Types

Set as Default Click this button to set the current list of selected file types as default values.
Revert to Default Click this button to revert the default settings specified on the Known File Types
tab of the Settings panel.
Reset to Click this button to revert to factory-preset default settings.
Recommended
Select All Click this button to select all file types in the list.
Clear All Click this button to clear all file types in the list except some predefined ones.
List of known file types
Document
AbiWord Adobe InDesign Adobe PDF Apple iWork Keynote
Document: .abw File: .indd document: .pdf document: .key
Apple iWork Pages Apple iWork document Capella document: .cap Final Draft
document: .pages Document: .fdr
FrameMaker GNU Info Garmin MapSource Lotus AMI Pro
Document: .fm Document: .info data: .mps Document: .sam
Lotus Organizer: .or5 Lotus Word Pro Microsoft Office Open Microsoft OneNote
Document: .lwp XML Document section file: .one
Microsoft Pocket Streets Microsoft PowerPoint Microsoft PowerPoint Microsoft Visio
Map File: .mps 2007 XML Document: .ppt document: .vsd
Document: .pptx
Microsoft Word 2007 Microsoft Word Word for Macintosh Microsoft Word2
XML Document: .docx Document: .doc Document: .mcw Document: .doc
Microsoft Works OLE Storage OpenOffice Writer OpenOffice
document: .wps document: .odt document: .ods
PageMaker PostScript QuarkXPress file: .qxd QuarkXpress
Document: .p65 document:.ps project: .qxp
Rich Text TEX document: .tex Text document: .txt Unicode
Document: .rtf document: .txt
WordPerfect
Document: .doc
Document: E-book
Chaoxing SSReader EPUB eBook: .epub FB2 eBook: .fb2 MOBI eBook: .mobi
eBook: .pdg Microsoft Money
Data: .mny
Microsoft Reader Microsoft Reader
eBook: .lit eBook
annotations: .ebo
Document: Spreadsheet
Apple iWork Numbers Lotus 1-2-3 v1 Lotus 1-2-3 v2 Lotus 1-2-3 v3
document: .numbers worksheet: .wk3 workshee: .wk1, .fmt worksheet: .wk3, .fm

41 R-Studio Manual
3
Lotus 1-2-3 v4 Lotus 1-2-3 Microsoft Excel 2/3/4 Microsoft Excel 2007
worksheet: .wk4 workbook: .123 worksheet: .xls XML
Document: .xlsx
Microsoft Excel 4 Microsoft Excel Quattro Pro
Spreadsheet: .xls Spreadsheet: .xls Spreadsheet: .wq1
Document: Database
Cathy database: .caf Data Interchange GDSII database: .gds Microsoft Access 2007
Format file: .dif XML
Document: .accdt
Microsoft Access 2007 Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Microsoft SQL
Database: .accdb Database: .mdb Log: .ldf Database: .mdf
MySQL Database MySQL database: .myi Omnis Studio Omnis Studio
Dictionary: .frm Library: .lbs Database: .df1
OpenOffice Base dBase III
document: .odb Database: .dbf
Document: Financial
Microsoft Money QuickBooks Backup QuickBooks Primary Quicken Data: .qdf
Data: .mny File: .qbb Data File: .qbw
TurboTax return
file: .tax
Internet-related files
Compiled HTML Internet shortcut: .url Microsoft OutLook Microsoft Outlook/?
file: .chm Personal Folder: .pst Inbox offline
folder: .ost
Mozilla Firefox browser Mozilla Mail Summary Outlook Express The Bat! Address
extension: .xpi file: .msf Messages: .dbx book: .abd
The Bat! Message The Bat! Message Windows Address XML document
Base: .tbb Index: .tbi Book: .wab (Unicode): .xml
Email
E-Mail Message: .eml Microsoft OutLook Microsoft Outlook Inbox Mozilla Mail Summary
Personal Folder: .pst offline folder: .ost file: .msf
Outlook Express The Bat! Address The Bat! Message The Bat! Message
Messages: .dbx book: .abd Base: .tbb Index: .tbi
Windows Address
Book: .wab
Font
Adobe PostScript Adobe Printer BDF Unix font: .bdf BGI font: .chr
Font: .pfb Font: .pfm
CPI DOS font: .cpi OpenType font: .otf TrueType Font: .ttf Windows System
Font: .fon

Graphics/?Picture
AVHRR Satellite Adobe Lightroom Adobe Photoshop Agfa/?Matrix Scodl
image: .sst preview: .lrprev image: .psd Image: .scd
Alias Wavefront Raster Amiga icon: .info ArcView Shape:.shp AutoCAD Binary
Image: .rla Image: .dxf
AutoCAD AutoCAD Image: .dxf Autodesc Animator Pro Autodesc Animator Pro
Drawing: .dwg color palette: .col Image: .pic
Autodesc Animator Autologic Image: .gm BMF image: .bmf Bentley MicroStation
Image: .pic CAD Drawing: .dgn
Canon (CR2) RAW Canon (CRW) RAW ColoRIX Image: .rix Computer Graphics
graphics file: .cr2 graphics file: .crw Metafile image: .cg
ComputerEyes Raw Continous Edge Graphic Corel Texture CorelDraw CMX
Image: .ce1, .ce1 Image: .ceg Image: .tex Image: .cmx
CorelDraw Image: .cdr Cubicomp Picture DICOM medical Digital Negative
Maker Image image: .dcm image: .dbg
.r8, .g8, .b8
Dr. Halo palette: .pal Enhanced MetaFile Epson RAW Epson Stylus
Image: .emf image: .erf Image: .prn
Erdas LAN/GIS Fractal Image Freehand (MX) Fuji RAW image: .raf
Image: .lan, .gis Format: .fif Database: .fh10
GEM Raster GEM VDI Image: .gdi CompuServe GIF Garmin Mapsource
Image: .img Image: .gif image: .img
Graphics Workshop for Gridded Binary HP Command Language HP Raster Image: .rtl
Windows Image: .grb Image: .pcl
Thumbnail: .thn
HSI JPEG Image: .hsi Hemera Photo-Object Hitachi Raster Hotspot Image: .shg
Image: .hpi Image: .hrf
IBM Picture Maker JPEG 2000: .jp2 JPEG Digital JPEG Image: .jpg
Image: .pic Camera: .jpg
Jovian Logic Image: .vi Kodak PhotoCD Kodak RAW LBM/IFF Image: .lbm
Image: .pcd image: .dng
Leica RAW image: .dng Lightwave Object: .lwo Lotus PIC Image: .pic Macintosh PICT
Image: .pct, .pic
Macintosh Paint Mamiya RAW McIDAS Satellite Microsoft Paint
Image: .mac image: .mef Image: .goe Image: .msp
Minolta RAW Nikon RAW OS/2 Icon: .ico Olympus RAW
image: .mrw image: .nef image: .orf
PBM Image: .pbm PGM Image: .pgm PIX Image: .pix PM Image: .pm
PNG Image: .png PPM Image: .ppm PaintShop Pro Panasonic RAW
Image: .psp image: .rw2
PaperPort Image: .max Pentax RAW Pictor PC Paint Print Shop Image: .pds
image: .pef Image: .pic

43 R-Studio Manual
Quick Link II fax QuickDraw 3D RAW Digital Camera RenderMan

Image: .qfx Metafile: .3dmf image: .dng Image: .rib
Ricoh RAW image: .dng SGI Image: .sgi STAD Image: .pac Samsung RAW
image: .dng
Seattle FilmWorks/? Sigma RAW Sketch Image: .sk SmartDraw file: .sdr
PhotoWorks image: .x3f
image: .pwm
Sony RAW image: .arw Sun Raster Image: .sun SymbianOS TI Image: .92i
Image: .mbm
Tagged Image Format TargetExpress Utah Raster Toolkit VITec Image: .vit
File: .tif image: .mte Image: .rle
Webshots Image: .wb1 Weresc CADE Windows Animated Windows Bitmap
drawing: .dtc cursor: .ani Image: .bmp
Windows Color Windows Fax Cover Windows MetaFile Windows cursor: .cur
Palette: .pal Image: .cpe Image: .wmf
Windows icon: .ico WordPerfect Graphics X PixMap Image: .xpm X Window Dump
Image: .wpg Image: .xwd
Xara Drawing: .xar ZSoft PCX Image: .pcx iPhoto Image: .attr
Multimedia: Audio Files
AIFF Sound: .aif AVR Sound: .avr AY Chip music: .ay AdLib Tracker 2
module: .a2m
Advanced Streaming Audacity audio: .au AudioCD file: .cda Battery 3 sample: .nov
Format file: .asf
CMF music: .cmf Common Loudspeaker Creative voice file: .voc DiamondWare
Binary: .cf1 sound: .dwd
Digital Speech File: .dss Digital voice file: .dvf EA ASF/MUS audio Extended M3U
file: .asf playlist: .m3u
FLAC audio KaraBox sound: .mkf La Lossless audio Liquid Audio File: .la1
file: .fla, .flac file: .la
MIDI Instrument MIDI music: .mid MIDI stream: .mds MPEG Layer I audio
definition: .idf file: .mpg
MPEG Layer II audio MPEG Layer III audio MUS music: .mus Monkeys audio
file: .mp2 file: .mp3 file: .ape
Musepack audio Next/Sun uLaw Nitro Composer Nord Modular G2
file: .mpc sound: .au sound: .minincs Patch: .pch2
Ogg Vorbis audio OptimFROG audio Portable Sound RIFF MIDI
file: .ogg file: .ofr Format: .psf music: .rmi
RK Audio sound: .rka Sierra AUD Sony OpenMG audio Super NES audio
sound: .aud file: .oma file: .spc
TTA audio file: .tta VQF sound: .vqf WavPack audio file: .wv Westwood AUD
sound: .aud

Windows Media Audio Windows WAVE X-MIDI music: .xmi ZyXEL sound: .zyx
File: .wma sound: .wav
aPac audio file: .apc
Multimedia: Video Files
3GPP multimedia audio/? 3GPP2 multimedia 4X Movie Video: .4xm Adobe Filmstrip
video: .3gp audio/?video: .3g2 Animation: .fsf
AMV Video: .amv ARMovie video: .rpl Adobe Filmstrip Autodesk
animation: .fsf Animator: .fli
BINK Video: .bik BluffTitler video: .bt DVM video: .dvm DeluxePaint
animation: .anm
Director video: .dcr DriveCam video: .dce Eyemail video: .eye Flash Video: .flv
Intel DVI Video: .dvi Intel Indeo Video Interplay MVE LZA animation: .lza
File: .ivf Video: .mve
LZA Animation: .lza Lotus ScreenCam MPEG Transport MPEG video: .mpg
video: .scm Stream video: .mts
MPEG-2 Transport Matroska video: .mkv MythTV video: .nuv NEOchrome
Stream video: .m2ts animation: .ani
Nancy Codec Nullsoft Video: .nsv QV-10 video: .cam QuickTime video: .mov
video: .noa
SGI movie format: .mv SMJPEG Video: .mjpg Sega FILM/?CPK Shockwave
video: .cpk video: .swf
Smacker video: .smk Sony Movie Player VOB video files: .vob VP6 encoded
video: .mqv Video: .vp6
VideoCD video: .vcd Vivo streaming Windows AVI Windows Media
video: .viv Video: .avi Video: .wmv
Multimedia Files
MP4 file: .mp4 Material Exchange RIFF Multimedia File Real Networks audio/?
File: .mxf video: .rm
Archive Files
7-Zip archive: .7z ACE archive: .ace AIN archive: .ain ARJ archive: .arj
ARX archive: .arx Android Package: .apk BAG archive: .bag BIX archive: .bix
BOA BZip2 archive: .bz2 BlackHole archive: .bh Blink archive: .bli
archive: .b58, .boa
CPIO archive: .cpio ChArc archive: .chz Compress archive: .z Crush archive: .cru
DEB archive: .deb FOXSQZ GZip archive: .gz HA archive: .ha
archive: .sqz
HAP archive: .hap HPack archive: .hpk Hyper archive: .hyp InstallShield CAB
archive: .cab
InstallShield Z archive: .z InstallShield compressed JAR archive: .jar JRC archive: .jrc
file

45 R-Studio Manual
LHA/?LZARK LZA LZOParchive: .lzo, . LZX archive: .lzx

archive: .lzh archive: .lza, .lzz lzop
LIMIT archive: .lim Microsoft Cabinet Microsoft Compress PAKLEO
archive: .cab compressed file archive: .pll
QFC archive: .qfc Quantum Quark archive: .ark RAR archive: .rar
archive: .q, .pak
RPM archive: .rpm ReSOF archive: .sof SAR archive: .sar SBC archive: .sbc
SQZ archive: .sqz SZip archive StuffIt archive: .sit TAR archive: .tar
UFA archive: .ufa UHArc archive: .uha UltraCompressor 2 WRAptor
archive: .uc2 archive: .wra
WinImp archive: .imp Windows Installer Windows Installer indows Installer
Merge Module: .msm Package: .msi Patch: .msp
Windows Installer Patch Windows Installer YAC archive: .yc YBS archive: .ybs
Creation File: .pcp Validation
Module: .cub
ZIP archive: .zip ZOO archive: .zoo ZZip archive: .zz iOS Package: .ipa
xz archive: .xz
Executable/?Library/?DLL
DOS Style ELF Executable (UNIX) ELF Library (UNIX) ELF Module (UNIX)
Executable: .exe
Java Bytecode: .class KolibriOS Executable NetWare Loadable Shell Script
Module: .nlm
UEFI Executable Windows DLL: .dll Windows Windows 9x Device
.efi Executable: .exe Driver: .vxd
Windows Device Windows OCX
Driver: .sys File: .ocx
Development files
ACUCOBOL object Borland Delphi Borland Turbo Pascal C/C++ Source
Compiled Unit: .dcu compiled Unit: .tpu Code: .c
COM Type GUI Design Studio LUA Script: .lua Library: .lib
Library: .tlb project: .gui
Microsoft .NET XML Microsoft ClassWizard Microsoft Linker Microsoft Precompiled
Resource file: .clw database .ilk header: .pch
template: .resx
Microsoft Program Microsoft Visual C++ Microsoft Visual Studio Microsoft Visual Studio
database: .pdb project: .mdp Solution: .sln project: .dsp
Microsoft Visual Studio OMF Object PolySpace results: .chk RDOFF Object
workspace: .dsw library: .lib File: .rdf
Resource Compiler Visual Studio Solution Visual Studio Widget Visual Studio
Script File: .rc User Options: .suo File: .wid Workspace Options
file: .opt

VisualBasic WinDev Window: .wdw Windows Compiled XPCOM Type

Project: .vbp resource (32bit) : .res Library: .xpt
Xcode
Project: .pbxproj
Disk images
Hyper-V virtual JAM compressed Norton Ghost disk QEMU virtual
disk: .vhdx disk: .jam image: .ghs disk: .qcow2
R-Drive Image disk VMware virtual Virtual PC virtual VirtualBox virtual
image: .rdr disk: .vmdk disk: .vhd disk: .vdi
Other file types
ABBYY Lingvo AIX Backup File: .bff ArtMoney Table CrystalMaker Data
dictionary: .lsd file: .amt File: .cmdf, .cmmf
Dwarf Fortress save EasyCrypto Fallout 3 save Java Applet cache
data: .dat file: .encrypted game: .fos index: .idx
Kaspersky Anti-Virus Kaspersky Anti-Virus Kaspersky Anti-Virus Magic 3D Easy View
data base: .avc report: .rpt signature bas: .kdc object: .x
Microsoft Security NHTSA UDS-1992 NOD32 Antivirus ORTIMZeit
Catalog: .cat crash test result: .uds Update file: .nup project: .ozv
OziExplorer Map PRO100 project: .sto PlayStation 3 RegEdit file: .reg
data: .map Theme: .p3t
RegEdit file Source Game Engine Unreal Package Valve Texture
(UNICODE): .reg Compiled AI File: .vtf
Nodegraph: .ain
WinHelp: .hlp WinHelp WinXP Prefetch file: .pf Windows Backup
Contents: .cnt File: .bkf
Windows Clipboard Windows Color Windows Windows National
file: .clp Profile: .icm Minidump: .dmp, .mdm locale: .nls
p
Windows Password Windows Registry Windows Thumbnail Windows User
file: .pwl hive: .dat, .hiv cache: .db Interface Module: .wim
Windows shortcut: .lnk X-Plane Scenery: .dsf XNA Game Data: .xnb
Note: Using scan for Known File Types, R-Studio can successfully recover only un-fragmented files.
You may also specify your own file types for scanning. See Customizing File Types for details. User-
defined file types precede over built-in ones, if their definitions overlap.
You may set the defaults for known file types on the R-Studio Settings.

47 R-Studio Manual
> R-Studio starts scanning the object, and its panel will show information about new found objects:
R-Studio Main panel
Drives panel after scanning:

You can select an object by clicking on it

The Log pane will show scan progress. Scan may be stopped by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar.
Later the scan process may be resumed with different scan parameters.
You may see which file object(s) is/are on a particular disk part. Click the corresponding rectangle on the
Scan Information pane and view the information on the Scan Information dialog box.
Scan Information dialog box
Double-click an object to view/?edit the file object in the Text/?hexadecimal editor.

When an object is scanned, a number of Recognized partitions will appear. R-Studio shows them in different
colors depending on which elements of the partition have been found.
An existing logical disk or partition
Both boot records and file entries are found for this partition
Only file entries are found for this partition
Only boot records are found for this partition
Empty space on the object
Files that have been found using scan for known file types (raw file search).
Although such recognized partitions are virtual objects, files can be searched for and recovered from
recognized partitions as from real logical disks using Basic File Recovery.
To see the information about a newly found object, simply click it on the Drives panel. Click this link to see
the information about the object Recognized13 on the logical disk H:.

49 R-Studio Manual
All scanned information may be deleted on the shortcut menu for a scanned object.
Scan information may be saved in a file. Previously saved scan information may be loaded. This can be done on
the Drive or shortcut menu for a selected object.
Multiple scans
If the selected object has been completely scanned, you may rescan it either completely or with new scan
parameters. If the selected object has been scanned partially, you may scan the rest of the object, ignore the
existing scan information and scan the entire object, or specify scan parameters manually.
R-Studio accumulates the information from successive scans and keeps track of changes in this information
obtained from different scans.
You may make several scans of successive or overlapping areas. Click the Advanced button, specify an offset
and size for a new area to scan on the Advanced Scan dialog box and click the Add button. You may specify
and add several scan areas. You may select which areas should be scanned. Selected scan areas can be merged.
Right-click a necessary area and select either Merge Down, Merge Down All, and Merge Selected.
Advanced Scan dialog box
Managing scan information

Scan information may be saved to a file. Previously saved scan information may be loaded.
To save scan information
1 Select an object on the R-Studio Drives panel
2 Select Save Scan Information on the Drive or shortcut menu and save the scan information in a file
The default file extension is *.scn.
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Save Scan Information File
dialog box will appear when you select a place to store scan info. You may save it to the local or remote
computer.

To load scan information

2 Select Open Scan Information on the Drive or shortcut menu and select the required file with the scan
information
The default file extension is *.scn.
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Open Scan Information File
dialog box will appear when you select a place to load scan info from. You may load it from the local or
remote computer.
> The scan information will appear in the Drives panel

To remove scan information
2 Select Remove Scan Information on the Drive or shortcut menu
> The scan information will disappear from the Drives panel
NEVER TRY TO SAVE SCAN INFORMATION ON THE OBJECT BEING SCANNED!!!
Or you may obtain unpredictable results and lose all your data.
2.2.2 Customizing File Types
You may create your own known file types and add their file signatures for scanning in Known File Types. They
will appear in their respective folders on the File Types dialog box.
You can do that either by using the R-Studio's graphic interface or by direct editing the known file description
file specified on the R-Studio Main settings dialog box.
Creating a Known File Types using a Graphic User's Interface
The easiest way to add your own is to use the R-Studio's graphic interface.
To create a Known File Type,
1 On the Known File Types settings dialog box, click the Edit User's File Types... button
> The Edit User's File Types dialog box will appear
Edit User's File Types dialog box

51 R-Studio Manual
2 Click the Create File Types button and specify File type properties
File Types properties

id digit Required Digital file type identifier. Should be unique for each custom file type.
group string Optional Specifies a file type group in which found files will appear. You may
specify either your own groups or select those predefined on the File
Types dialog box.
descrip string Optional Brief file description
tion
feature NO_SCAN Optional Additional properties of the file type. If you want to specify several
s TXT_ANS properties, they should be separated by a space.
I
NO_SCAN: Not to be scanned for. If this flag is used, R-Studio will
TXT_UNI
CODE not search for such file type. Such files will be shown when sorting
files by their extensions.
TXT_ANSI: The file can be viewed as ANSI text. If this flag is
specified, the file can be correctly represented as an ANSI text.
When previewing, this file will be immediately sent to Text/?
hexadecimal editor.
TXT_UNICODE: The file can be viewed as UNICODE text. If this flag
is specified, the file can be correctly represented as a UNICODE
text. When previewing, this file will be immediately sent to Text/?
hexadecimal editor.
extensi <string Optional File extension.
on >
3 Click the Add Signature button, specify the signature parameters, and click the Save button

File signature properties

Begin Specifies from where the signature begins.
End If End, the offset is from the end of file to the first byte of the signature. That is, if the
signature is two bytes long, the offset value should be 2.
AND Shows the order of the logical operation (union or intersection)
OR
From A decimal number specifying the leftmost possible offset for the file signature.
To A decimal number specifying the rightmost possible offset for the file signature.
You may specify as many signatures as you need. Moreover, you may specify subgroups within a signature
using the Add Subgroup button. The structure of such possible subgroups is described on the Customizing
File Types-II help page.
> The newly specified file type will appear on the Edit User's File Types dialog box and the File Types
dialog box
2.2.3 Customizing File Types-I

The syntax of signature description is similar to that of the XML language. They are stored in the file specified on
the R-Studio Main settings dialog box.
More advanced features are described in Customizing File Types-II.
Signature file example
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<FileTypeList>
<FileType id="2" group="archive" description="ARJ Archive" extension="arj">
<Signature offset="3" count="1">Abc\x5c\x00\x04</Signature>
<Signature offset="9" count="2">\x23\x01\xf4</Signature>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
File structure
File header
The file starts with a standard XML header
Section FileTypeList
<FileTypeList>
It requires a closing element </FileTypeList>.

53 R-Studio Manual
Section FileType
This is a description of each file signature.
Attributes:
id <u32> Required Digital file type identifier.
Should be unique for each
file type.
group <string> Optional Specifies a file type group Default: unknown
in which found files will
appear. You may specify
either your own groups or
those predefined on the
File Types dialog box.
description <string> Optional Brief file description Default: null (no description)
features NO_SCAN Optional Additional properties of Default: 0
TXT_ANSI the file type. If you want
TXT_UNICODE
to specify several
properties, they should be
separated by a space.
extension <string> Optional File extension. Default: null (no extension)
File type properties flags
NO_SCAN Not to be scanned for. If this flag is used, R-Studio will not search for such file type. Such
files will be shown when sorting files by their extensions.
TXT_ANSI The file can viewed as ANSI text. If this flag is specified, the file can be correctly
represented as an ANSI text. When previewing, this file will be immediately sent to Text/?
hexadecimal editor.
TXT_UNICOD File can viewed as UNICODE text. If this flag is specified, the file can be correctly
E represented as a UNICODE text. When previewing, this file will be immediately sent to
Text/?hexadecimal editor.
This section can contain an unlimited number of the Signature elements.If there are several Signature
elements, that means that all those signatures are simultaneously present in the file. Such signatures should have
different offset attributes and they should not overlap.
Element Signature
The element contains a string value of the file signature consisting of ASCII characters and hex bytes in the \xhh
format, where hh is a hexadecimal byte code. If there is not a hexadecimal number after \x , \x are treated as a
part of the string section of the signature
Attributes:
offset <u16> Optional Decimal offset for the signature Default: 0
count <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the Default: 1
number of signatures of the same
length. Used when several signatures
of the same length starting with the
same offset can be present in a file.

In this case they should be

sequentially written in the element,
and the size attribute specifies the
length of signature. count*size
should be equal to the number of
bytes in the element.
If only one signature can be on this
offset, count should be equal "1",
and size should be equal to the
length (the number of bytes) of the
signature.
size <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the Default: the number
number of bytes in the signature. of bytes written in
the element.
from begin Optional Specifies from where the offset is Default: begin
end calculated.
If end, the offset is from the end
of file to the first byte of the
signature. That is, if the signature is
two bytes long, the offset value
should be 2.
Comments

An XML standard string for a comment.
2.2.4 Customizing File Types-II
Currently R-Studio supports two versions of file type descriptions. Version 2 extends legacy Version 1 by
adding variable signature offsets and AND/OR combination of several signatures in one file type. The version of
file type description is specified by the version attribute of the FileTypeList section . Version 1 is the default
option.
File structure
Elements common to Versions 1 and 2 of file type description
File header
The file starts with a standard XML header
Section FileTypeList
<FileTypeList>
Attributes:
version 1.0 Optional Version of file type description Default: 1.0
2.0
It requires a closing element </FileTypeList>.
Comments

55 R-Studio Manual
An XML-standard string for a comment.

Version 1 of file type description
<FileTypeList>
<Signature offset="3" count="1">Abc\x5c\x00\x04</Signature>
<Signature offset="9" count="2">\x23\x01\xf4</Signature>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
Section FileType
Attributes:
id <u32> Required Digital file type identifier.
Should be unique for each
file type.
group <string> Optional Specifies a file type group Default: unknown
in which found files will
appear. You may specify
either your own groups or
those predefined on the
File Types dialog box. See
the table below.
description <string> Optional Brief file description Default: null (no description)
features NO_SCAN Optional Additional properties of Default: 0
TXT_ANSI the file type. If you want to
TXT_UNICODE
specify several properties,
they should be separated
by a space.
extension <string> Optional File extension. Default: null (no extension)
File type properties flags
NO_SCAN Not to be scanned for. If this flag is used, R-Studio will not search for such file type.
Such files will be shown when sorting files by their extensions.
TXT_ANSI The file can be viewed as ANSI text. If this flag is specified, the file can be correctly
represented as an ANSI text. When previewing, this file will be immediately sent to
hexadecimal editor.
Text/?
TXT_UNICODE The file can be viewed as UNICODE text. If this flag is specified, the file can be
correctly represented as a UNICODE text. When previewing, this file will be
immediately sent to Text/?hexadecimal editor.
List of predefined file type groups
Group Name on the File Types dialog box.
archive Archive Files
graphics Graphics/?Picture
internet Internet-related files

multimedia Multimedia Files

audio Multimedia: Audio Files
video Multimedia: Video Files
font Font
document Document
doc_database Document: Database
doc_sheet Document: Spreadsheet
exe Executable/?Library/?DLL
unknown Other file types
This section can contain an unlimited number of the Signature elements.If there are several Signature
elements, that means that all those signatures are simultaneously present in the file. Such signatures should have
different offset attributes and they should not overlap.
Element Signature
format, where hh is a hexadecimal byte code. If that is not a hexadecimal number after \x, \x are treated as a
Attributes:
count <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the number of Default: 1
signatures of the same length. Used when
several signatures of the same length starting
with the same offset can be present in a file. In
this case they should be sequentially written in
the element, and the size attribute specifies
the length of signature. count*size should be
equal to the number of bytes in the element.
If only one signature can be on this offset,
count should be equal to "1", and size should
be equal to the length (the number of bytes) of
the signature.
size <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the number of Default: the
bytes in the signature. number of bytes
written in the
element.
from begin Optional Specifies from where the offset is calculated. Default: begin
end If end, the offset is from the end of file to the
first byte of the signature. That is, if the
signature is two bytes long, the offset value
should be 2.
Version 2 of file type description
<FileTypeList version="2.0">

57 R-Studio Manual
<FileType id="5626" group="_Test" description="Test file" extension="tst">

<Begin combine="and">
<Signature from="0" to="20">ABC</Signature>
<Signature offset="1">CDEFG</Signature>
<AND>
<Signature offset="0">DE</Signature>
<Signature offset="0">RTD</Signature>
<OR>
<Signature offset="12">CP</Signature>
</OR>
</AND>
</Begin>
<End combine="or">
<Signature from="3" to="20">ABC</Signature>
<Signature offset="5">CDEFG</Signature>
<AND>
<Signature offset="2">DE</Signature>
<OR>
<Signature offset="12">CP</Signature>
</OR>
</AND>
</End>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
Section FileType
Attributes:
Similar to those in Version 1.
The section can contain one element Begin and one End. It should contain at least one of them.
Example
<FileTypeList version=”2.0”>
<Begin [attributes]>
...
</Begin>
<End [attributes]>
...
</End>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
Sections Begin and End
Specify the positions of file type signatures in the file.
Attributes
combine and Optional Shows the order of the logical Default: and
or operation (union or intersection)

These sections can contain one of several elements Signature. And one or several elements OR or AND. If there
are several elements inside the section they are combined according to the attribute combine.
Example:
<Begin combine="or">
<Signature [attributes]> ... </Signature>
...
<AND>
...
</AND>
<OR>
...
</OR>
</Begin>
<End>
<OR>
...
</OR>
...
</End>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
Sections AND and OR
These sections can contain one of several elements Signature. And one or several elements OR or AND. If there
are several elements inside the section they are combined according to the section type (logical AND or OR).
Example:
<Begin>
...
<AND>
<OR>
<AND>
</AND>
<OR>
</OR>
</OR>
</AND>

59 R-Studio Manual
</Begin>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
Element Signature
format, where hh is a hexadecimal byte code. If that is not a hexadecimal number after \x, \x are treated as a
Attributes:
from <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the Default: undefined
leftmost possible offset for the file
signature.
Ignored if the offset attribute is
specified.
to <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the Default: undefined
rightmost possible offset for the file
signature.
Ignored if the offset attribute is
specified.
size <u16> Optional Decimal number specifying the Default: the number
number of bytes in the signature. of bytes written in
the element.
Example:
<Begin>
<Signature offset="3">Abc\x5c\x00\x04</Signature>
<Signature from="9" to="15">\x23\x01\xf4</Signature>
</Begin>
</FileType>
</FileTypeList>
2.2.5 Regions
Scanning large objects may take a long time. Sometimes, only a smaller area of a disk needs to be scanned or
searched for files. Such area is called a region. A region can be created on any object in the R-Studio's Drives
panel.
Created regions can be scanned, and files on them can be recovered in the same way as from hard drives or
logical disks.
Created regions can be deleted or their size can be changed.
Note: R-Studio does not create anything real on the disk. Regions are virtual objects that do not affect actual
data on the disk.

To create a region
1 Select an object on the R-Studio's Drives panel and click the Create Region button
Other ways to create the region
· Right-click the selected object and select Create Region on the shortcut menu
or
· Select the object and select Create Region on the Create menu
or
· Select the object and press the F4 key on the keyboard
2 Specify required parameters on the Create region dialog box and click the Create button
Create region dialog box
Region options
Disk size: Shows size of the object where the region is to be created. The region cannot be larger
than this size.
Start: Start point of the region
Size: Size of the region. Cannot be larger than Disk size.
> A Region object will appear on the Drives panel.
To change the size of a region

* Right-click the Region on the R-Studio Drives panel, select Edit on the shortcut menu, and enter a new
size on the Edit Region dialog box.
To convert a region into an exclusive one
* Right-click the Region on the R-Studio Drives panel and select Exclude area on the shortcut menu
To remove a region
* Select a Region on the R-Studio Drives panel and click the Remove button, or
Right-click the selected region and select Remove Region on the shortcut menu.

61 R-Studio Manual
2.2.6 Exclusive Regions

Exclusive regions are areas on any object visible on the R-Studio's Drives panel that are excluded from disk
operations. R-Studio never tries to read/?write data from/to such area. Exclusive regions are necessary when, for
example, there are areas with bad sectors on a hard drive, and it is necessary to avoid any disk operations with
such areas to not inflict further damage to such drive and to speed work with it.
Note: R-Studio does not create anything real on the disk. Exclusive regions are virtual objects that do not affect
actual data on the disk.
To create an exclusive region
1 Right-click an object on the R-Studio's Drives panel and select Create Exclusive Region on the
shortcut menu, or
Select the object and select Create Exclusive Region on the Create menu
2 Specify required parameters on the Create Exclusive Region dialog box and click the Add button
Create exclusive region dialog box
Exclusive Region options

Start: Start point of the entire exclusive region
Size: Size of the entire exclusive region. Cannot be larger than Disk size.
Offset: Offset of the excluded area.
Size: Size of the excluded area.
> An Exclusive Region object will appear on the Drives panel.
Its properties can be seen on the Excluded Areas tab.

To remove an exclusive region

* Select an Exclusive Region on the R-Studio Drives panel and click the Remove button, or
Right-click the selected region and select Remove Region on the shortcut menu.
To change the size of an exclusive region
* Right-click an Exclusive Region on the R-Studio Drives panel, select Edit on the shortcut menu, and
remove excluded areas on the Edite Exclusive Region dialog box.
add/?
You may remove an excluded area by right-clicking it and selecting Remove on the shortcut menu.
2.2.7 Images
An image is an exact, byte by byte, copy of any object on the Drives panel. When created, images can be
processed like their original objects.
Images are very useful if there is a risk of total data loss due to hardware malfunction. If bad blocks are
constantly appearing on a hard drive, you must immediately create an image of this drive. All data search, scan
and restoring can be done from this image.
While creating images, R-Studio can simultaneously perform disk scan and save scan information to lessen time
necessary to process the disk.
The image can be saved on the remote computer if it is created via network. R-Studio can also load and process
images created with the DeepSpar Disk Imager™.
To create an image,
1 Select an object on the R-Studio's Drives panel and click the Create Image button
Other ways to create the image
· Select the object and select Create Image on the Drive menu
or
· Right-click the selected object and select Create Image File on the shortcut menu
2 Specify image options, a file name, and destination for the image on the Create Image dialog box
Note: To store an image file, you need a free space equal to at least the object size.
Create Image (Main) dialog box

63 R-Studio Manual
Create Image (Scan Information) dialog box
Create Image (Advanced) dialog box
Image Options
Image name Specifies the name and path for the image file
Byte to byte image If this option is selected, R-Studio will create a simple exact copy of the object.
This image format is compatible with the previous versions of R-Studio.
Compressed image (R- If this option is selected, R-Studio will create an image file which can be
Drive Image compressed, split into several parts, and password-protected. This image file is
compatible)
fully compatible with the images created by R-Drive Image, but incompatible
with the previous versions of R-Studio.
Image compression You may compress the data in the image to save space. Active only if the
ratio Compressed image (R-Drive Image compatible) is selected.
Estimated size Shows the estimated size of the image file. An actual image size depends on how
much empty space is on the selected partition and what file types are there.
Active only if the Compressed image (R-Drive Image compatible) is selected.
Image split size You may set this option to Automatic and let Windows decide how to split the
image file. This mostly depends on the file system on the destination disk. You
may also either explicitly specify the split size, or choose a preset for various
devices with removable storage. Select Fixed size for that. Active only if the
Compressed image (R-Drive Image compatible) is selected.
Password You may protect your image file with a password. Note: This feature provides a
relatively moderate protection against conventional unauthorized access. Active
only if the Compressed image (R-Drive Image compatible) is selected.
Create scan information If this option is selected, R-Studio will perform disk scan simultaneously with
file image creation. See the Disk Scan help page to learn scan options.
Read attempts Specifies a value for I/O Tries, or how many times R-Studio will try to read a
bad sector.


· If Default read attempts is set to 0, the entire part with bad sectors will be filled
with the specified pattern.
· If Default read attempts is set to a non-zero value, R-Studio reads again that
part sector by sector, repeating the attempts the specified number of times. If
R-Studio still cannot read a bad sector, it fills the sectors with the specified
pattern. In this case only the bad sectors will be filled with the pattern, but that
extremely slows the disk read process.
For example, if you set Default read attempts to 1, a bad sector will be read 2
times.
Pattern to fill bad blocks Specifies a pattern R-Studio will use to fill bad sectors in this image. You may
specify the pattern either in the ANSI or Hex data format.
Note: R-Studio will never ever try to write anything on the disk from which data
is to recover or an image is to create. This pattern fills bad sectors only in the
image.
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Create Image dialog box will
have a different look. You may save the image to the local or remote computer.
> R-Studio will start creating the image, the Progress message showing the progress.
To process an already created Image, the image file should be opened.
To open an image
1 Click the Open Image button, or
Select Open Image File on the Drive menu
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Open Image File dialog box will
appear when you select a place to load the image file from. You may load it from the local or remote
computer.
2 Select the required image file

> An Image object will appear on the Drives panel
Depending whether this is a byte-by-byte or compressed (R-Drive Image compatible), its appearance in
the Drives panels is different.
You may perform all data search, scan, and recovery from this image as it were a regular drive/?disk object.

65 R-Studio Manual
A logical disk (or disks) containing in an image can be connected to the operating system as a device which
makes its content accessible to any program including any other data recovery software.
To connect a logical disk in an image
1 Right-click the logical disk in the image on the Drives panel and select Mount on the shortcut menu
2 Select a disk letter to assign to the connected logical disk and click OK
> A Virtual disk object will appear on the Drives panel
and this virtual disk will be available to system in the read-only mode

To disconnect a virtual disk from the system

1 Right-click the virtual disk in the image on the Drives panel and select Unmount on the shortcut menu
2.2.8 Object Copy
You may copy any object in the Drives panel to any other object, if there is enough space on the target one.
Before Copy object to... becomes enabled on the Create menu, you need to enable writing.
To enable writing,
1 On the R-Studio main panel, select the Tools menu, then Settings, and select Enable Write on the
Settings dialog box.
> The Copy object to... will be enabled on the Create menu.
Now objects can be copied.
Depending on the objects to copy and your tasks, you may do:
Binary (byte to byte copy)
An exact copy of the source object (or a part thereof) to the destination device (from its beginning or a specified
offset). Any object may be copied to any object this way.
To perform a binary copy of an object,
1 Select Copy object to... on the Create menu
2 Select a source and destination objects on the Drives Copy Wizard panel and click the Next button
Drives Copy Wizard

67 R-Studio Manual
3 Select Binary (byte to byte) copy on the Copy Options dialog box, specify copy options, and click the
Next button
Copy options dialog box
Copy options
Source
Copy whole object Select this option if you want to copy the entire source object to the destination one
Copy range Select this option if you want to copy a part of the source object
Offset Specify the offset from which the source object data will be copied to the destination
object
Size Specify the size of the source object data which will be copied to the destination
object
Destination
Offset Specify the offset on the destination object to which the source object data will be
copied
3 View the copy task settings on the Drives Copy Wizard and click the Finish button
Drives Copy Wizard
or click the <Back button to edit the copy parameters

> R-Studio will start copying data from the source object to the destination one.
Smart partition copy
Only partitions can be copied with this option to other partitions or empty spaces. You may change some
parameters of the the copied partition(s) on the destination drive.
To perform a smart partition copy of a partition,
2 Select source and destination partitions on the Drives Copy Wizard panel and click the Next button
Drives Copy Wizard
3 Select Smart partition copy on the Copy Options panel, specify copy options, and click the Next button
Copy options
Destination
Copy without Select this option if you want to copy the partition exactly to the destination place
stretching

69 R-Studio Manual
Copy to: Select this option if you want to change some parameters of the copied partition on
the destination place
Free space before Specify how much space will be left empty before the start of the copied partition
Partition size Select this option and specify the new size of the copied partition
Partition type Specify the type of the partition to be copied. Do not change this setting unless you
Primary (Active)/? have serious reasons to do so.
Primary/?Logical
Drives Copy Wizard
or click the <Back button to edit the copy parameters

> R-Studio will start copying data from the source partition to the destination place.
Smart drive copy
Only whole drives can be copied with this option to other drives. You may change some parameters of the
copied drives.
To perform a smart drive copy of a hard drive,
2 Select a source and destination hard drives on the Drives Copy Wizard panel and click the Next button
Drives Copy Wizard

3 Select Smart drive copy on the Copy Options panel, specify copy options, and click the Next button
Copy options
Copying mode
Copy all partitions Select this option if you want to copy all partitions to their original places.
onto original places
One partition after Select this option if you want to copy the partitions one after another preserving their
another space. If there is empty space between the partitions, it will be omitted. Otherwise it
is similar to Copy all partitions onto original places.
If Fixed active partition is selected, the original offset/?size of the active partition will be
preserved (in case the loader has links to it).
Expand/?S hrink Specify this option if you want to proportionally expand/?shrink the selected partitions
partition to whole to occupy the entire target drive.
disk
If Fixed active partition is selected, the original offset/?size of the active partition will be
preserved (in case the loader has links to it).

71 R-Studio Manual
Drives Copy Wizard
or click the Cancel button to cancel this process.

> R-Studio will start copying data from the source hard drive to the destination one.
2.3 Mass File Recovery
Recovery of multiple files
If you need to recover multiple files you may do it through the following steps:
1 Find and mark all the necessary files
Go to the Find and Mark Multiple Files topic for more information
2 Recover all marked files in a single file recovery step
Go to the Recover Multiple Files topic for more information
3 Create file recovery lists to manually edit the list of files to recovery
Go to the File Recovery Lists topic for more information
Memory considerations
R-Studio stores information about found files in computer memory. If there are too many files, R-Studio may
run out of it. To avoid this, you have two options:
Recover all files
If you want to recover data from an entire file system object (a logical disk, partition, partition image, etc.), you
may use the Recover All Files command from the Drive or shortcut menu. Right click the object in the Drives
panel to access the shortcut menu. A Recover dialog box will appear. Select required restore settings, including
file mask. This command restores unlimited number of files without memory restrictions.

View file information in steps

As soon as R-Studio nearly runs out of memory, a Too many files... message appears. You may temporally
stop file listing and browse through found files. Then you can resume file listing. You also may skip this file section
and continue file listing.
In all cases, R-Studio keeps information about the entire file structure.
· Find and Mark Multiple Files
· Recover Multiple Files
2.3.1 Find and Mark Multiple Files
If you need to find and mark many files at once, you may do that in the following ways:
By sorting them by their extensions or creation/?
m odification/?
accessed time
To sort files by their extensions or creation/?
modification/?
accessed time,
* On the Folders panel select the tab
Extensions to sort the files by their extensions
Creation to sort the files by their creation time
Time
Modificationto sort the files by their modification time
Time
Accessed to sort the files by their accessed time
Time
Other ways to sort files by their extensions or creation/?
m odification/?
accessed time
· Select the disk on Drives panel, select Open Drive Files Sorted By on the Drive menu, and select the
respective option,
or
· On the Drives panel, right-click the disk and select Open Drive Files Sorted By on the shortcut menu and
select the respective option,
or
· On the Folders panel, right-click the disk letter and select Show Files Sorted By on the shortcut menu
and select the respective option,
> R-Studio will show the sorted files in the Folders and Content panels, showing the path to each file:
Folders panel for files sorted by their extensions
Content panel with files/?

folders sorted by their extensions

73 R-Studio Manual
To return to the conventional view,

* On the Drives panel, right-click the logical disk, select Open Drive Files Sorted By on the shortcut
menu, and select Real File System Structure,
or
On the Folders panel, select Show Files Sorted By on the Drive menu and select Real File System
Structure
or
Click the Real tab
By finding and marking multiple files using the Find/?Mark dialog box
You may find and mark all the files on the entire disk by using Mark matched files in the Find/?Mark mode option.
You may specify all the necessary search options and mark all the found files. Please note that each find and
mark/?unmark operation is independent from previous ones. That is, if a file matches the search criteria, it will be
marked/?unmarked regardless of its previous marked/?unmarked state.
For example, if you first mark all doc files, and then all txt files, all doc files remain marked, too. If you then
decide to unmark all files smaller than 2 kB, all doc and txt files will stay marked except those that less than 2
kB.
2.3.2 Recover Multiple Files
If R-Studio while recovering files encounters either an already existing file or file with a broken name, normally it
will stop working and ask you what to do with the file. If you recover multiple files, that may require you answer
a lot of the same questions. You may use Mass File Recovery Options on the Recover dialog box to instruct
R-Studio what to do in those cases for all files.
Recover (Advanced) dialog box

Advanced file recovery options

File Already Exists These options instruct R-Studio what to do if there already exists a file with the
same name.
Extended options If this option is selected, more advanced options become accessible to process
multiple duplicates of the file.
Prompt If this option is selected, R-Studio asks the user what to do for each such file.
It stops file recovery until it receives the answer.
Rename If this option is selected, R-Studio adds a File ID to the file name. If a file
already exists with the same name and that file ID, a number will be added to th
file name and file ID.
Skip If this option is selected, R-Studio skips all new files with the same name.
Overwrite If this option is selected, R-Studio overwrites the existing file with the new one.
Overwrite Older If this option is selected, R-Studio overwrites the existing file with the new one
if the existing file is older than the new file. The time stamp used is Modified.
Overwrite Smaller If this option is selected, R-Studio overwrites the existing file with the new one
if the existing file is smaller than the new file. The time stamp used is Modified.
Overwrite Bigger If this option is selected, R-Studio overwrites the existing file with the new one
if the existing file is bigger than the new file. The time stamp used is Modified.
Broken File Name These options instruct R-Studio what to do if a file to be recovered appears to
have an invalid name.
Prompt If this option is selected, R-Studio shows the standard Broken File Name
dialog box for each file with a broken file name. It stops file recovery until it
receives the answer.
Rename and change all If this option is selected, R-Studio changes all invalid characters to the
invalid symbols to: character specified.
Skip If this option is selected, R-Studio skips all files with broken file names.
Hidden Attribute These options instruct R-Studio what to do if a file to be recovered appears to
have the Hidden attribute.
Prompt If this option is selected, R-Studio asks the user what to do with the attribute.
It stops file recovery until it receives the answer.
Remove If this option is selected, R-Studio removes the Hidden attribute from all files.
Keep If this option is selected, R-Studio keeps the Hidden attribute for all files.
Extended options
These options give you more flexible ways to process multiple files with the same name. You may compare
files by time (Modified) and size, and decide what R-Studio should do with those duplicates. If any of the
files has an invalid time, the comparison by time is skipped. In this case, if comparison by size is not active,
R-Studio goes to the default action..

75 R-Studio Manual
Recover (Advanced - Extended options) dialog box
Extended advanced file recovery options

First compare These options instruct R-Studio which condition to use first, file time or size.
time
First compare
size
Compare These options instruct R-Studio to enable comparison by time and size..
time
Compare size
Actions These selectable actions instruct R-Studio what to do if the condition is met.
Empty If this option is selected, R-Studio skips the condition.
field
Prompt If this option is selected, R-Studio asks the user what to do for each such file. It stops file
recovery until it receives the answer.
Rename If this option is selected, R-Studio adds a File ID to the file name. If a file already exists with
the same name and that file ID, a number will be added to th file name and file ID.
Skip If this option is selected, R-Studio skips all new files with the same name.
Overwrite If this option is selected, R-Studio overwrites the existing file with the new one.
Time If the Modified time stamp is invalid, R-Studio will skip the comparison.
conditions
Equal time Two time stamps are the same.
Older The existing file is older than the new one.i
Newer The existing file is newer than the new one.i
Size
conditions
Equal sizeTwo files have the same size.
Smaller The existing file is smaller than the new one.i
Bigger The existing file is bigger than the new one.i
By default The action R-Studio takes when none of the comparison conditions have been met. That
may happen when the comparison by size is not enabled.
2.3.3 File Recovery Lists
You may create a file containing a list of files and folder found on a disk/?partition. Then such file may be manually
edited to specify files to recover and then loaded back into R-Studio. R-Studio will automatically mark the files

in this list for recovery. Such file lists recovery are very useful, for example, when it is necessary to have such file
lists approved for recovery by someone else who is far away from the computer where R-Studio is running.
You may create file recovery lists for the entire disk or for specific folders. Moreover, you may create a file
recovery list for all files within the disk/?folder, or for marked files/?folders only.
Creating a file recovery list
To create a file recovery list
1 For an entire disk, select Save File Names to File on the File menu, or
Right-click the uppermost folder (higher than Root, usually the letter or the name of the disk) and select Save
File Names to File on the shortcut menu.
For a specific folder, right-click the folder and select Save File Names to File on the shortcut menu.
2 Specify the place to save the file recovery list and other necessary options on the Save File Names
dialog box
Save File Names dialog box
Save File Names options

File name: Specifies file name of the file recovery list.
Save only marked files/? If this option is selected, only marked files will be included into the file recovery
folders from... list.
Save sub folders If this option is selected, sub folders and their files will also be included into the
file recovery list.
File format: Specifies the file format in which localized file/?folder names will be saved, You
may select either the UTF-8 or UTF-16 codepage. Also you may write a
special BOM header to the file which helps some text editors to understand
which codepage is used.
Advanced options Specifies information to include into the file.
Structure of a file recovery list file created by R-Studio

An example of such a file:
sort: by real
:# PathDelim = \
Docs\
:! Id: 4587531
:! Flags: directory
:! Created: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! Modified: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! Accessed: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! MFT number: 70

77 R-Studio Manual
:! Parent MFT number: 5

:! Regions (sector size=512B): sector 2433976 (offset: 50 )
:! size: 2 Bytes / residentsector 2433976 (offset: 80 )
:! size: 222 Bytes / residentsector 2433977
:! size: 136 Bytes / resident
Docs\MyDoc1.odt
:! Id: 4653067
:! Flags: valid first data offset
:! Created: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! Modified: 2011-03-01T17:41:14
:! Accessed: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! File type: OpenOffice Writer Document
:! Recovery chances: Good (Existing file)
:! MFT number: 71
:! Regions (sector size=512B): sector 2268
:! size: 24 KB (24,576 Bytes) / first datasector 2433978 (offset: 80 )
Docs\MyDoc2.odt
:! Id: 4718603
:! Created: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! Modified: 2011-02-28T23:31:02
:! Accessed: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! MFT number: 72
:! size: 24 KB (24,576 Bytes) / first datasector 2433980 (offset: 80 )
Docs\MyDoc3.odt
:! Id: 4784139
:! Created: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! Modified: 2011-02-28T23:31:10
:! Accessed: 2011-04-05T22:42:13
:! MFT number: 73
:! size: 177.38 MB (185,991,168 Bytes) / first datasector 2433982 (offset: 80 )

:# PathDelim = \ is a parameter specifying a character for path delimitation. You may also specify a Unix-
stile delimiter / .
:# PathDelim = \
:# PathDelim = /
In addition, the files from the virtual folders Metafiles, ExtraFoundFiles, etc..., have the following
designations:
Metafiles: ///m/[localized_name_for_Metafiles]/
Extra Found ///e/[localized_name_for_ExtraFoundFiles]/
Files:
Other Virtual ///v/[localized_name_for_OtherVirtualFolders]/
Folders:
For the English language, that will look like:
///m/Metafiles\
///m/Metafiles\$BOOT
///m/Metafiles\$FAT
///m/Metafiles\$FAT0
///m/Metafiles\$FAT1
Editing the file recovery list file

All files included into a file recovery list will be marked when the file will be loaded into R-Studio. So, if you have
some files in the file recovery list that doesn't need to be recovered, just delete them from the list. In addition, you
may use the following marks to specify some options
:+ Mark all files and subfolders within the folder.
:* Mark only files within the folder.
:- Unmark the file or all files and subfolders within the folder.
:= Unmark the file or only files within the folder.
processes records in the file consequently. That is, if there are the following lines in the file,
:+Files to Delete\
:-Files to Delete\File_2.pst
the file File_2.pst won't be marked for recovery, while for the lines
:+Files to Delete\
file File_2.pst will be.
Please note that records for folders without any marks don't affect the file marking. Thus, for the lines
Files to Delete\
file File_2.pst will not be marked.
Loading the file recovery list
To load a file recovery list into R-Studio,
* Select Load File Names from File and Mark on the File menu and select the file.
> R-Studio will load the file and mark the files accordingly.

79 R-Studio Manual
2.4 Volume Sets and RAIDs

R-Studio detects and processes valid hardware volume sets and RAIDs like regular drives/volumes.
R-Studio can analyze and recover data from software volume sets and RAIDs. If a software volume set or
RAID is present in your system, R-Studio detects it, and a Volume sets and RAIDs object appears on the
Drives panel. This object can be searched for files, scanned, and files found on it can be recovered the same way
as from normal drives/volumes.
If, due to hardware failure, a hardware volume set or RAID cannot be accessed, or due to data loss your system
does not recognize a software volume set or RAID, and you know what hard drives were in it, you may create a
Virtual volume set or RAID and process it like a real software volume set or RAID or hardware volume set or
RAID.
You may find more information on RAID data structure in Wikipedia.
You may turn numerical indexes for objects to distinguish them better while creating virtual RAIDs.
· Volume Sets, Stripe Sets, and Mirrors
· Basic RAID 4 and RAID 5 Operations
· Working with RAID 6 Presets
· Working with RAID6 (Double Xor)
· Working with RAIDs with Parity Delays
· Working with Advanced RAID Layouts
· Nested and Non-Standard RAID Levels
· Finding RAID Parameters
· Checking RAID Consistency
· Syntax of a Description File for RAID Configurations
· Description Files for RAID Configurations
· Reverse RAIDs
· Various Disk and Volume Managers
Managing your own RAID layouts
To save your own RAID layout in the presets
1 Click the More... button on Parents tab and select Save on the shortcut menu.
2 Specify the name for the configuration on the Preset name dialog box.
Preset name dialog box
> The new RAID configuration will be saved in the presets

The configurations are stored in the user's RAID layout file. The path and name for this file is specified on the
R-Studio Settings dialog box. If no file is specified, R-Studio will ask you to enter the name.
Loading your RAID configuration
If there're objects in the Parents tab, the preset will be applied to them. If the Parents tab is empty, R-Studio
will search the disks listed in the Drives tab for the parents in the user's RAID layout file. If the search fails,
R-Studio will show the Reference Parents not found message.

To load your RAID configuration

1 Click the More... button on Parents tab and select the preset you want to load
> The new RAID configuration will be loaded
To edit your own RAID configuration
1 Click the More... button on Parents tab and select Edit... on the shortcut menu
2 Select the required configuration on the Edit Block RAID Layout Presets dialog box.
Edit Block RAID Layout Presets dialog box
3 Edit the parameters of the configuration and save it

> The new configuration parameters will be saved.
Turning Disks On-Line and Off-Line on-the-fly

You may turn the objects in the virtual RAID or volume set on-line and off-line by selecting/?clearing the checkbox
on the Parents tab. It may be useful, for example, if you need to see which disk is non-actual in a RAID 5.
Actually, when you turn an object off-line, R-Studio substitutes it with a Missing Disk or Empty Space object.
Missing Disks and Empty Space
If one partition from a hardware volume set or RAID or software volume set or RAID is absent, due to
hardware failure, for example, you need to add a virtual missing disk or empty space in order to correctly re-
construct the hardware volume set or RAID or software volume set or RAID structure. The missing disk/?empty
space should be placed in the same place as the missing partition.
Note: R-Studio does not write anything real on the disk. Missing disks/?empty space are virtual objects that do
not affect actual data on the drive.
To add a Missing disk/?
Empty space object
1 Select a Volume sets and RAIDs object on the R-Studio's Drives panel
2 Right-click in the Parents tab in the right pane and select Add Missing Disk or Add Empty Space on the
shortcut menu or select Add Missing Disk or Add Empty Space on the Create menu. Which object type
is necessary, R-Studio decides automatically.
For the Empty space object, Specify its size on the Add Empty Space dialog box.
Add Empty Space dialog box
> A Missing Disk or Empty Space object will appear in the Parents tab

81 R-Studio Manual
2.4.1 Volume Sets, Stripe Sets, and Mirrors
To create a Volume set object

1 Click the Create Virtual RAID button and select Create Virtual Volume set
or select the Create Virtual Volume set on the Create menu
> A Virtual Volume set object will appear on the Drives panel
2 Drag the required partitions from the Drives panel to the Parents tab
Other ways to add objects
· Right-click the Parents tab and select the required partition from the shortcut menu,
or
· Right-click the partition on the Drives panel, select Add to RAID on the shortcut menu, and select the RAID object
you want to add the partition to.
Note: Objects should be placed in the same order as they were in the original volume set. If this order is
incorrect, you must change it by dragging the parents to place them in the correct order.
> The Virtual volume set or RAIDs object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
If R-Studio detects a valid file system on the newly created RAID object, a partition object will appear on
the Drives panel.
To create a Stripe set object (RAID 0)

1 Click the Create Virtual RAID button and select Create Virtual Block RAID & Autodetect
or select the Create Virtual Block RAID & Autodetect on the Create menu

> A Virtual Block RAID object will appear on the Drives panel
2 Select RAID 0 (Stripe set) on the RAID type

or
You may either make R-Studio to process your changes immediately or wait until you finish editing the
RAID layout. Select or clear the Apply changes immediately checkbox on the Parents tab. Click the Apply
button to apply the changes when are you through.
Object control buttons
Locate Click this button to locate the selected object in the Drives panel.
Add Empty Space/?A dd Missing Disk Click this button to add an empty space or missing disk object to the
RAID
Remove Click this button to remove the selected object from the RAID
Move Up Click this button to move up the selected object in the RAID
Move Down Click this button to move down the selected object in the RAID
Synchronize Offsets Click this button to make the offsets the same for all objects in the RAID
Reset changes Click this button to return the configuration to the initial state (after
clicking the Apply button or immediately after loading)
The Block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original volume set.
You also need to specify Block order. You may select it on the Blocks order drop-down or shortcut menu.
If the those parameters are not correct, data on the parents will not be damaged, but they cannot be
recovered.

83 R-Studio Manual
> The Virtual Block RAID object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
The Description Files for RAID Configurations topic shows the RAID description file for this RAID
configuration.
You also may check the RAID consistency, if necessary. See the Checking RAID Consistency help page
for details.
To create a Mirror set object (RAID 1)
1 Click the Create Virtual RAID button and select Create Virtual Mirror
or select the Create Virtual Mirror on the Create menu
> A Virtual Mirror object will appear on the Drives panel

or
> The Virtual Mirror object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
2.4.2 Basic RAID 4 and RAID 5 Operations

RAID 4 and RAID 5 are much similar. You may create and edit a RAID 4 object the same way as a RAID 5
one.
To create a RAID 5 object
2 Select RAID 5 on the RAID type

85 R-Studio Manual
or
Note: Objects should be placed in the same order as they were in the original RAID 5. If this order is
RAID
The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original RAID 5.
You also need to specify Block order for virtual RAID 5. You may select it on the Block order drop-down or
shortcut menu.
If the those parameters are not correct, data on the parents will not be damaged, but files from the RAID 5
cannot be recovered.
Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original RAID 5. Find a file and preview it.
If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID 5 layout.
If your RAID 5 has an unusual configuration, you may create them manually. See Working with Advanced
RAID Layouts for details.
Parents tab
> The RAID 5 object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
Creating and saving your own RAID 5 configuration
You may create and save your own RAID configurations for non-standard RAIDs. You may specify Offset,
Block order/?size and Row count. See Working with Advanced RAID 5 Layouts for details.
2.4.3 Working with RAID 6 Presets
R-Studio allows you to create and process RAID 6 layouts. You may use either presets for several RAID 6
layouts, or use your own custom ones.
R-Studio provides presets for the following RAID 6 layouts:
Reed-Solomon
Left Synchronous Left Asynchronous Right Synchronous Right Asynchronous
(standard), (continuous),
Creating a RAID 6 object from a preset:
We will use the Reed-Solomon (Left Synchronous (standard)) preset as an example.

87 R-Studio Manual
2 Select RAID 6/?

Reed-Solomon on the RAID type
or
Parents tab
RAID

The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original volume set.
You also need to specify Blocks order (Left Synchronous (standard) for our case) for virtual RAID 6. You may
select it on the Blocks order drop-down or shortcut menu.
recovered.
Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original volume set or RAID. Find a file
and preview it. If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID layout.
volumes
the Drives panel. The Description Files for RAID Configurations topic shows the RAID description file
for this RAID configuration.
for details.
2.4.4 Working with RAID6 (Double Xor) Presets
R-Studio allows you to create and process RAID 6 Double Xor layouts with the following presets:
EVENODD RAID DP X-Code(2) Adaptec 3805
In addition you may create your own RAID 6 configurations.
Creating a RAID 6 (Double Xor) object from a preset:
We will use the EVENODD preset as an example.
To create a RAID 6 (Double Xor) object

89 R-Studio Manual
2 Double Xor on the RAID type

Select RAID 6/?
or
Parents tab
RAID

The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original volume set.
You also need to specify Blocks order (EVENODD for our case) for virtual RAID 6 (Double Xor). You may
select it on the Blocks order drop-down or shortcut menu.
recovered.
Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original volume set or RAID. Find a file
and preview it. If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID layout.
volumes
the Drives panel. The Description Files for RAID Configurations topic shows the RAID description file
for this RAID configuration.
for details.
2.4.5 Working with RAIDs with Parity Delays
R-Studio allows you to create RAIDs with parity delays (any level that allows that). For example, let us create a
RAID 5 the parity delays with the following layout:
· Three disks,
· Delay=16
· Block size: 16 KB
· Offset: 1088 sectors (544 KB)
· Block order: Left Asynchronous (Continuous)
Block order table:
A B C
1 1 2 PD
2 3 4 PD Delay=16
3 5 6 PD
4 7 8 PD

91 R-Studio Manual
5 9 10 PD
6 11 12 PD
7 13 14 PD
8 15 16 PD
9 17 18 PD
10 19 20 PD
11 21 22 PD
12 23 24 PD
13 25 26 PD
14 27 28 PD
15 29 30 PD
16 31 32 PD
17 33 PD 34
18 35 PD 36
19 37 PD 38
20 39 PD 40
21 41 PD 42
22 43 PD 44
23 45 PD 46
24 47 PD 48
Delay=16
25 49 PD 50
26 51 PD 52
27 53 PD 54
28 55 PD 56
29 57 PD 58
30 59 PD 60
31 61 PD 62
32 63 PD 64
33 PD 65 66
34 PD 67 68
35 PD 69 70
36 PD 71 72
37 PD 73 74
38 PD 75 76 Delay=16
39 PD 77 78
40 PD 79 80
41 PD 81 82
42 PD 83 84
43 PD 85 86
44 PD 87 88
45 PD 89 90
46 PD 91 92
47 PD 93 94
48 PD 95 96
To create such RAID 5,
1 Click the Create virtual volume sets or RAIDs button and select Create Virtual Block RAID & Autodetect
or select Create Virtual Block RAID & Autodetect on the Create menu
Check that the Apply changes immediately check box is clear on the Parents tab. This will prevent R-Studio
from trying to start processing the RAID configuration until you specify it completely.
2 Drug the required objects from the Drives pane to the Parents tab and select RAID 5 on the RAID type
or
These objects may be hard drives, logical disks, or images. Check that the objects are correctly placed.
RAID
3 Specify the Block size and Offset parameters on the Parents tab
Disregard the Block order field.
4 Specify the parity delay number in the Parity delay control on the Parents tab.
The number of rows will change to 48.
If necessary, adjust the First parity parameter

93 R-Studio Manual
By default, this parameter is set equal to Parity delay. By changing it, you may "shift" the block order table.
For example, when the First parity parameter is set as 1 for the RAID 5 of 3 disks with Parity delay of 3.,
the block order table will be the following:First parity parameter
5 Select Left Asynchronous (Continuous) on the Block Order Field and click the Apply button on the
Parents tab
> The created Virtual Block RAID 1 object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
?
If R-Studio detects a valid file system on this RAID object, a partition object will appear on the Drives
panel.
configuration.
for details.

2.4.6 Working with Advanced RAID Layouts

R-Studio allows you to create and process very complex custom RAID layouts.
Advanced RAID 5
For example, let us create a RAID 5 with the following layout:
· Three disks,
· Block size: 4 KB
· Block order:
A B C
1 PD 1 2
2 PD 3 4
3 PD 5 6
4 7 PD 8
5 9 PD 10
6 11 PD 12
7 13 14 PD
8 15 16 PD
9 17 18 PD
To create such RAID 5,
2 Drug the required objects from the Drives pane to the Parents tab and select Custom on the RAID type
or
RAID

95 R-Studio Manual
Disregard the Block order for field.
4 Manually enter 9 to Number of rows on the Parents tab
The Block order table will expand.
5 Enter the block order in the table on the Parents tab
Use the RAID Sequence window to move from one row to another.
Sequences window
Using the keyboard: arrow keys to navigate, digit and p keys to enter the block order.
Using the mouse: right-click the cell and select the number or parity from the shortcut menu. If the block
table is too large, you better use the keyboard to enter the digits.
Corrections: R-Studio will tell you if some digits are not correct. Navigate to the required cell and enter the
correct value. Use the Delete key to clear a cell.

Clear the table: Right-click the table and select Clear all on the shortcut menu.
6 When you finishes entering the information, click the Apply button on the Parents tab
volumes
panel.
configuration.

97 R-Studio Manual
for details.
Advanced RAID 5
Another example is a RAID with the following layout, similar to that used in Mac Pro internal RAID cards with 4
hard drives.
· Four disks,
· Block size: 512 KB (1024 sectors)
· Block order:
Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 Sequence 4
A B C D A B C D A B C D
PD 1 2 PD 3 4 PD 5 6 PD 7 8
As you see, this layout cannot be fit directly into a standard 2D block order table. Still, it's possible to create
such RAID layout using the RAID Sequence window.
To create such RAID,
or
RAID

Disregard the Block order field.
4 Manually enter 3 to Number of rows on the Parents tab and change Block order to Custom
5 Right-click the RAID Sequence window and select Remove All. Manually enter 3 to Number of rows on
the Parents tab
6 Right-click Cell 1 in the block order table and select Create New Sequence.
7 Right-click Cell 2 in the block order table and select Add to Sequence, do that for Cell 3, too.
8 Right-click Cell 4 in the block order table and select Create New Sequence.
9 Right-click Cell 5 in the block order table and select Add to Sequence, do that for Cell 6, too.
Continue those steps for the rest of the table until the RAID Sequence window will have 4 sequences of 3
disks:
Sequences window
10 Select the first line in the RAID Sequence window, right-click Cell 1 in the block order table, and select
Parity of Data.
If any unnecessary sequences appear, right-click them in the RAID Sequence window, and select Remove.
11 Right-click Cell 2 in the block order table and select 1, do that for Cell 3 selecting 2.
If any unnecessary sequences appear, right-click them in the RAID Sequence window, and select Remove.
12 Move to the next sequence in the RAID Sequence window and repeat the procedure for cells 4, 5, and
6.
Do that for the rest of the sequences until you fill all cells in the block order table in the Parents tab.

99 R-Studio Manual
volumes
panel.
configuration.
for details.
Advanced RAID 6 Layout
For example, let us create a RAID 6 with the following layout:
· Five disks,
· Block size: 64 KB
· Offset: 0
· Block order:
A B C D E
1 RS 1 2 3 PD
2 4 5 6 PD RS
3 8 9 PD RS 7
4 12 PD RS 10 11

5 PD RS 13 14 15
6 PA PA PA PA PA
where
PD is parity of data;
PA is parity of all;
RS is Reed-Solomon;
Rows from 1 to 5 use two types of error correction: parity of data (xor) and Reed-Solomon. That is, row 1 uses
blocks A1 and E1, row 2 uses blocks D2 and E2, and so on.
Row 6 is used for error correction for columns. That is, column A uses block A6, column B uses B6, and so on.
Parity of all is used for error correction.
or
RAID
Disregard the Block order parameter.

101 R-Studio Manual
4 Manually enter 6 to Number of rows on the Parents tab

5 Enter the block order in the table on the Parents tab
You may enter either a block number, or an error correction block of the following types:
PD Parity of data
PA Parity of all
RS Reed-Solomon
SP Spare Part
I Ignore
Note: You should specify an error correction block only when the correct sequence is selected on the RAID
Sequences window.
Sequences window
Using the keyboard: arrow keys to navigate, digit, and rs, pd, pa, u, i keys to enter the block order.
Using the mouse: right-click the cell and select the number or parity from the shortcut menu. If the block
table is too large, you better use the keyboard to enter the digits.
For the rows:

Select the required row sequence on the RAID Sequences window, select the cell on the RAID table, and
enter the required value. R-Studio automatically generates those sequences when you add RAID parents.
For the columns and arbitrary sequences:
You need to create those sequences and add the respective blocks to it manually.
To create a sequence: Click Add empty on the RAID Sequences window or select Create New
Sequence on the shortcut menu on the Parents tab.

To add a block to a sequence: Right-click the respective cell and select Add To Sequence on the shortcut
menu on the Parents tab.
To remove a block to a sequence: Right-click the respective cell and select Remove From Sequence on
the shortcut menu on the Parents tab.
6 When you finishes entering the information, click the Apply button on the Parents tab
volumes
panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.7 Nested and Non-Standard RAID Levels
R-Studio can work with various nested and non-standard RAID levels. Currently, the following RAID levels are
supported:
· RAID10 (1+0)
· RAID1E
· RAID5E

103 R-Studio Manual
· RAID5EE
· RAID6E
2.4.7.1 RAID10 (1+0)
A RAID 10 (or 1+0) is a stripe of mirrors. Its block order can be represented as:
A B C D
1 1 1 2 2
or
3 Select RAID 10 on the RAID type
RAID

The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original RAID 10.
You also need to specify Block order for virtual RAID 10. You may select it on the Block order drop-down or
shortcut menu.
If the those parameters are not correct, data on the parents will not be damaged, but files from the RAID 10
Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original RAID 10. Find a file and preview
it. If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID 10 layout.
Parents tab
> The RAID 10 object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.7.2 RAID1E
RAID 1E is utilizes both the mirroring and striping: data is striped across all drives, as in RAID 0. Additionally, a
copy of each stripe is stored on a different drive, as in RAID 1. Its block order can be represented as:

105 R-Studio Manual
A B C
1 1 1 2
2 2 3 3
To create a RAID 1E object
or
3 Select RAID 1E on the RAID type
Note: Objects should be placed in the same order as they were in the original RAID 1E. If this order is
RAID
The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original RAID 1E.
You also need to specify Block order for virtual RAID 1E You may select it on the Block order drop-down or
shortcut menu.
If the those parameters are not correct, data on the parents will not be damaged, but files from the RAID 1E

Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original RAID 1E. Find a file and preview
it. If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID 1E layout.
Parents tab
> The RAID 1E object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.7.3 RAID5E
RAID 5E (where E stands for Enhanced) is a RAID 5 layout with an integrated hot-spare drive, where the spare
drive is an active part of the block rotation scheme. An example of such RAID layout is in the table below:
A B C D
1 1 2 3 PD
2 5 6 PD 4
3 9 PD 7 8
4 PD 10 11 12
5 SP SP SP SP

107 R-Studio Manual
where PD and SP stand for Parity of Data and Spare Part.

or
RAID
shortcut menu.

Parents tab
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.7.4 RAID5EE
RAID 5EE (where E stands for Enhanced) is a RAID 5 layout with an integrated hot-spare drive, where the
spare drive is an active part of the block rotation scheme. An example of such RAID layout is in the table below:
A B C D
1 1 2 SP PD
2 4 SP PD 3
3 SP PD 5 6
4 PD 7 8 SP
where PD and SP stand for Parity of Data and Spare Part.

109 R-Studio Manual
To create a RAID 5EE object

or
3 Select RAID 5EE on the RAID type
Note: Objects should be placed in the same order as they were in the original RAID 5EE. If this order is
RAID
The RAID block size and Offset (in sectors) parameters must be set the same as for the original RAID 5EE.
You also need to specify Block order for virtual RAID 5EE You may select it on the Block order drop-down
or shortcut menu.
If the those parameters are not correct, data on the parents will not be damaged, but files from the RAID
5EE cannot be recovered.
Note: You may check how correctly you have reconstructed the original RAID 5EE. Find a file and preview
it. If the file appears correct, you have created a correct RAID 5EE layout.

Parents tab
> The RAID 5EE object can now be processed like regular drives/?
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.7.5 RAID6E
RAID 6E (where E stands for Enhanced) is a RAID 6 layout with an integrated hot-spare drive, where the spare
drive is an active part of the block rotation scheme. An example of such RAID layout is in the table below:
A B C D E F
1 RS 1 2 3 4 PD
2 5 6 7 8 PD RS
3 10 11 12 PD RS 9
4 15 16 PD RS 13 14
5 20 PD RS 17 18 19
6 PD RS 21 22 23 24
7 SP SP SP SP SP SP

111 R-Studio Manual
where RS, PD and SP stand for Reed-Solomon, Parity of Data, and Spare Part, respectively.
or
RAID
shortcut menu.

Parents tab
volumes
the Drives panel.
configuration.
for details.
2.4.8 Finding RAID Parameters
R-Studio can find parameters for RAID 5 and 6. RAID parameters can be found automatically or manually.
The number of disks in the RAID should be between 3 and 32. RAID parameters can be found only when all
original disks (or their images) are present. Even one substitute object in a RAID (like a missing disk) makes
finding RAID parameters impossible.
To find RAID parameters automatically,

113 R-Studio Manual
1 Click the Auto Detect button on the Parents tab

> R-Studio will start searching for the RAID parameters and show the most probable one on the RAID
Parameter Detection dialog box
RAID Parameter Detection dialog box
2 Click the Apply button and R-Studio will change the RAID layout to the selected one on the Parents
tab.
3 Click the Apply button on the Parents tab
> R-Studio will use the found parameters for the RAID.
If necessary, you may return to the RAID Parameter Detection dialog box by clicking the Choose Variants
button, and select another RAID layout.
To find RAID parameters manually,
1 Click the drop-down Auto Detect list on the Parents tab and select Advanced Detection.
2 Specify the necessary detection parameters on the RAID Parameter Detection dialog box and click the
Start detection button
Raid Parameters Detection dialog box
You may change the disk order, offset for disk(s), and enable/?
disable disks.
Advanced Parameters

Max offset: The area on the disk to find RAID parameters in.
Offset search Cumulative parameters that estimates the probability of certain found RAID
performance parameters. Moving it to the right increases accuracy but slows the process.
RAID layouts search
performance
Moving it to the left reduces the accuracy but makes the process faster.
You may add your own RAID offsets. Right-click empty space on the Found offsets pane and select Add
Custom offset on the shortcut menu and specify the offset individually for every disk.
3 Select an offset and click the Click here to find RAID Layouts button on the Raid Parameters Detection
dialog box
RAID Parameters Detection dialog box
4 Select a RAID variant on the Found RAID layouts pane and click the Apply button
5 Click the Apply button on the Parents tab
> R-Studio will use the found parameters for the RAID.
If necessary, you may return to the RAID Parameter Detection dialog box by clicking the Choose Variants
button, and select another RAID layout.
2.4.9 Checking RAID Consistency
You may check RAID consistency (whether the data parity values are valid) for RAID layouts with parity
blocks.
To check RAID consistency,
* Right-click the RAID and select Check RAID consistency... on the shortcut menu

115 R-Studio Manual
> The RAID consistency check window will appear showing the progress.
RAID consistency check window
When the check is finished, you may inspect the results.

Block
color
Green Data parity values are valid.
Red Data parity values are not valid.
White 0's
When a mouse pointer hovers over a block, a tooltip will show the sector range within the block and number
of consistent and inconsistent sectors. Double-clicking the block moves it to the upper-leftmost corner and
zooms in the data by 2.
RAID consistency check controls
Sectors The number of the first sector in the row.
Offset Offset in the data. Enter the address you want to jump to and press the Enter key.
Sectors/?Bytes/?KB... Specifies the dimension of the data in the Offset field.
Previous/?Next Moves to the previous/?next part of the data.
+/?- Zooms into/?out of, the data.
2.4.10 Syntax of a Description File for RAID Configurations
You may create and store your own RAID configurations The syntax of those files is similar to that of the XML
language. They are stored in an .xml file specified on the R-Studio Settings.
A number of file examples are shown on the Description Files for RAID Configurations topic.
There are two types of such description files: for RAID presets and custom-created RAID layouts.
RAID preset configuration file
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<RAIDList version="1">
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID5" rows="3" type="5" order="2"
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent comp="RAID5Disk1.dsk" name="Promise1+0 JBOD1.10"
size="40060321792" order="1"/>
size="40060321792" order="2"/>
size="40060321792" order="3"/>

</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Custom-created RAID configuration file example

<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID6Complex" rows="6" type="256">
<Parents>
<Parent name="img1.bin" size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="img2.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="2"/>
</Parents>
<Table>
<Block id="A1">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="B1">1</Block>
<Block id="C1">2</Block>
<Block id="D1">3</Block>
<Block id="E1">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="A2">4</Block>
<Block id="D2">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="E2">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="C3">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="D3">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="E3">7</Block>
<Block id="B4">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="C4">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="A5">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="B5">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="A6" sequence="1">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="B6" sequence="2">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="C6" sequence="3">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="D6" sequence="4">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="E6" sequence="5">XorOfAll</Block>
</Table>
<Sequences>
<Sequence id="1">A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="2">B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="3">C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="4">D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="5">E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6</Sequence>

117 R-Studio Manual
</Sequences>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
File structure
File header
The file starts with a standard XML header:
Section RAIDList
<RAIDList>
It can contain any number of the <RAID> sections and requires a closing element </FileTypeList>.
Section structure example:
<RAIDList>
<RAID [attributes]>
...
</RAID>
...
<RAID [attributes]>
...
</RAID>
Section RAID
This section describes each RAID layout.
It must contain at least one <Table> and <Parents> sections and can contain one block <Sequences>..
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
</Parents>
<Table>
</Table>
<Sequences>
</Sequences>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Attributes:
blocksize <u32> Required The block size of the RAID in bytes
name <string> Optional The name of the RAID layout
rows <u16> Required The number of rows in the RAID layout table.
type <u16> Required The type of the RAID preset. The following types are
supported:
1: RAID0 (Stripe set)
2: RAID10
3: RAID1E
4: RAID4
5: RAID5
6: RAID5E
7: RAID5EE
8: RAID6 / Reed-Solomon Encoding
9: RAID6E / Reed-Solomon Encoding
10: RAID6 / Vertical Xor Encoding
256: Custom Raid Table
If the RAID type parameter contradicts to the RAID table,
the RAID table always prevails.
order <u16> Required/Optio The RAID sub-type. For example, order="2" means Left
nal Asynchronous for RAID5 layouts. Any value for the custom
RAID layouts will be ignored.
parityDela <u16> Required The Parity delay parameter.
y
<RAID blockSize="65536" rows="6" type="256">
<Parents>
</Parents>
<Table>
</Table>
<Sequences>
</Sequences>
</RAID>
Section Parents
This section describes the RAID parents. It contains the <Parent> elements of the RAID.
<Parents>
size="40060321792" order="1"/>
size="40060321792" order="2"/>
size="40060321792" order="3"/>
</Parents>
Element Parent
The element specifies the parent of the RAID.
Attributes:
comp <string> Required/O The file-container with the parent object.
ptional
name <string> Required The object name of the RAID parent.
offset <u16> Required is The offset value in bytes
not 0
size= <u16> Required The object size in bytes

119 R-Studio Manual
order <u16> Required The order of the RAID object

Section Table
This section describes the RAID layout table. It contains the <Block> elements which number is a product of
two attributes in the <RAID> section: <parents> x <rows>.
<RAIDList>
<RAID name="example" parents="2" rows="2" blocksize="16777216">
<Table>
<Block [attributes]> ... </Block>
</Table>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Element Block
The element specifies the block number in the RAID layout table (a positive integer number) or an error
correction block of the following types:
· PD or ParityOfData
· PA or ParityOfAll
· RS or ReedSolomon
· U or Unknown
· I or Ignore
Any other value is treated as Unknown.
Attributes:
id <string> Required The alpha-numerical identifier of the block in the RAID layout
table. The element in the 3-rd column of the 2-nd line is
designated as C2. AA is used after letter Z, and so on.
sequence <string> Optional The numerical identifier for non-default sequences.
Section Sequences
This section describes the non-default data checksum sequences used to preserve data integrity. It is not
necessary to explicitly list default sequences (the table rows). Sequences can contain any number of the
<Sequence> elements.
<RAIDList>
<RAID name="example" parents="4" rows="4" blocksize="16777216">
<Parents>
</Parents>
<Table>
...
</Table>
<Sequences>
<Sequence [attributes]> ... </Sequence>
...

<Sequence [attributes]> ... </Sequence>

</Sequences>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Element Sequence
The element contains the list of the RAID blocks belonging to that sequence. The elements are separated by a
space .
Attributes:
id <u16> Required The sequence identifier.
Element example:
See the RAID configuration file example.
Comments
An XML standard string for a comment.
2.4.11 Description Files for RAID Configurations
Below are description files for RAID examples described in the Volume Sets and RAIDs chapter. The syntax
of them is described in the Syntax of a Description File for RAID Configurations topic.
StripeSet
The stripe set layout is described in the Volume Sets, Stripe Sets, and Mirrors topic.
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="StripeSet" rows="2" type="1" order="7"
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
size="40060321792" order="1"/>
size="40060321792" order="2"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Basic RAID 5
The RAID layout is described in the Working with Basic RAID 4 and RAID 5 Operations topic.
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
size="40060321792" order="1"/>
size="40060321792" order="2"/>
size="40060321792" order="3"/>
</Parents>

121 R-Studio Manual
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID 5 with parity delays
The RAID layout is described in the RAID5 with Parity Delays Operations topic.
<RAID blockSize="16384" name="RAID5HP" rows="48" type="5" order="2"
parityDelay="16" firstParity="16">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID5HPDisk1.bin" offset="557056" size="941359104"
order="1"/>
order="2"/>
order="3"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Advanced RAID 5
The RAID layout is described in the Working with Advanced RAID Layouts topic.
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID5CDisk1.bin" offset="16777216" size="941359104"
order="1"/>
order="2"/>
order="3"/>
</Parents>
<Table>
</Table>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Advanced RAID 5
<RAID blockSize="524288" name="RAID_MacPro" rows="3" type="256">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID_MAC_ProDisk1.bin" fs="NTFS" offset="16777216"
size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="RAID_MAC_ProDisk2.bin" offset="16777216" size="941359104"
order="2"/>
order="3"/>
order="4"/>
</Parents>
<Table>
<Block id="A1" sequence="1">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="D1" sequence="2">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="C2" sequence="3">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="B3" sequence="4">XorOfData</Block>
</Table>
<Sequences>
<Sequence id="1">A1 B1 C1</Sequence>
<Sequence id="2">D1 A2 B2</Sequence>
<Sequence id="3">C2 D2 A3</Sequence>
<Sequence id="4">B3 C3 D3</Sequence>
</Sequences>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID 6 Reed-Solomon (Left Synchronous (Standard)) Preset
The RAID layout is described in the Working with RAID 6 Presets topic.

123 R-Studio Manual
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID6RS" rows="5" type="8" order="1"

parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID6 (Double Xor) Preset
The RAID layout is described in the Working with RAID 6 Presets topic.
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID62X" rows="4" type="10" order="1"
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID62X1.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="RAID62X2.bin" size="941359104" order="2"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
Advanced RAID 6
<Parents>
</Parents>
<Table>
<Block id="A1">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="E1">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="D2">XorOfData</Block>
<Block id="E2">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="D3">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="C4">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="B5">ReedSolomon</Block>
<Block id="A6" sequence="1">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="B6" sequence="2">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="C6" sequence="3">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="D6" sequence="4">XorOfAll</Block>
<Block id="E6" sequence="5">XorOfAll</Block>
</Table>
<Sequences>
<Sequence id="1">A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="2">B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="3">C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="4">D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6</Sequence>
<Sequence id="5">E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6</Sequence>
</Sequences>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID10 (1+0)
The RAID layout is described in the RAID10 (1+0) topic.
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID10-1.bin" size="941359104" order="1"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID1E
The RAID layout is described in the RAID1E topic.
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID1E" rows="2" type="3" order="1"
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID1EDisk1.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="RAID1EDisk2.bin" size="941359104" order="2"/>

125 R-Studio Manual
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID5E
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID5EDisk1.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="1"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID5EE
The RAID layout is described in the RAID5EE topic.
<RAID blockSize="65536" name="RAID5EE" rows="4" type="7" order="1"
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID5EEDisk1.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="RAID5EEDisk2.bin" size="941359104" order="2"/>
<Parent name="RAID5EEDisk3.bin" size="941359104" order="3"/>
<Parent name="RAID5EEDisk4.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="4"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>
RAID6E
parityDelay="1">
<Parents>
<Parent name="RAID6E1.bin" size="941359104" order="1"/>
<Parent name="RAID6E2.bin" fs="NTFS" size="941359104" order="2"/>
</Parents>
</RAID>
</RAIDList>

2.4.12 Reverse RAIDs

Reverse RAIDs is a technique that is reverse to creating virtual RAIDs. When creating a reverse RAID, the data
from a real object is decomposed into virtual parents.Then data on those virtual parents can be processed like on
real objects. They can be viewed, edited, imaged, copied to physical drives, etc.
· Reverse RAID of an Object
This technique can be used to decompose data on a single volume into virtual parents. Then such virtual parents
can be processed like on real objects. They can be viewed, edited, imaged, copied to physical drives, etc.
· Reverse RAID of a RAID
This technique can be used to re-construct data on individual RAID disks when data on physical disks is
corrupted, but can be recovered using RAID redundancy. A missing disk is an example of this case. Or if there
are bad sectors scattered over the physical disks but the overall RAID integrity remains. Then the data can be
copied to physical hard drives to create a healthy RAID.
Note: Many controllers write their own metadata to disks to recognize that the disks belong to certains RAIDs.
Without that metadata they won't see those RAIDs. You have to write that metadata manually.
2.4.12.1 Reverse RAID of an Object
This technique can be used to decompose data on a single object into virtual parents. Then such virtual parents
can be processed like on real objects. They can be viewed, edited, imaged, copied to physical drives, etc.
Suppose you have an image of a former RAID 6 (Reed-Solomon) and you wand to re-create data on individual
disks from that RAID 6. You can do that by creating a reverse RAID of an image.
To create a reverse RAID of a disk image (or other disk object),
1 Right-click the disk object on the Drives panel and select Create Reverse RAID on the shortcut menu.

127 R-Studio Manual
> The Reverse parents will appear on the Drives panel
Initially, the reverse RAID is set to its default values as RAID 5 on the Parents tab.
2 Adjust RAID parameters on the Parents tab, as necessary.

You need to add one reverse parent, change RAID type, and adjust RAID offset .
> Process the appeared reverse parents on the Drives panel as real objects.
These parents can be imaged, viewed/?edited, etc.

2.4.12.2 Reverse RAID of a RAID
This technique can be used to re-construct data on individual RAID disks when data on physical disks is
corrupted, but can be recovered using RAID redundancy.
Suppose you have a RAID 5 with one missing hard drive and you need to reconstruct data on that disk. You can
do that by creating a reverse RAID for it and then copy data from that missing disk to a real one, or to an image.
To create a reverse RAID of a RAID with a missing disk,
1 Create a virtual RAID 5 of the existing hard drives or their images
Add a missing disk to the Parents tab.
If necessary, read the Basic RAID 4 and RAID 5 Operations and Volumes Sets and RAIDs help pages for
details.
2 Right-click the Virtual Block Raid on the Drives panel and select Create Reverse RAID on the shortcut
menu.

129 R-Studio Manual
> The Reverse parents will appear on the Drives panel
These parents may be processed as real objects, they can be imaged, viewed/?edited. For your case the
missing disk can be copied to a hard drive in the Drive Copy Wizard.
Note: The reverse parents contain the data that should be on the RAID parents, according to its layout,
while RAID parents contain actual data, that may be corrupted.
2.4.13 Various Disk and Volume Managers
R-Studio can work with objects created by various disk and volume managers. Currently, the following
managers are supported:
· Windows Dynamic Disks
· Windows Storage Spaces
· Apple RAIDs
· Apple CoreStorage/? File Vault/?Fusion Drive Volumes
· Linux mdadm RAIDs
· Linux Logical Volume Manager (LVM and LVM2)
R-Studio can automatically recognize and add their physical components, component images, or the user can
manually add the components when their data is damaged so severely that R-Studio cannot recognize them.
2.4.13.1 Windows Dynamic Disks
R-Studio supports dynamic disks, including Windows software RAIDs, mirrors, and spanned volumes. When
R-Studio detects components from such dynamic disks, it assembles them accordingly.

Windows dynamic disks (RAID5)
R-Studio detects components form dynamic disks and creates those dynamic disks automatically. At the same
time, R-Studio gives access to the parents of the dynamic disks (hard drives and images).
Windows dynamic disks (RAID5) in R-Studio
If recognized parents of a dynamic disk, including disk images, are added to R-Studio later, it automatically adds
them to their respective dynamic disk.
When an automatically created dynamic disk is selected, R-Studio highlights its components.
Also, R-Studio automatically detects inconsistent components of dynamic disks and marks them accordingly.

131 R-Studio Manual
Windows dynamic disks (RAID5) with unsynced parent
R-Studio shows the components of the selected dynamic disk on its LDM Components tab.
LDM Components tab
R-Studio shows broken dynamic disks in pink.

Broken dynamic disks in R-Studio
The LDM Components tab also allows you to manually disconnect or connect the components, for example, if
they are such damaged that R-Studio cannot recognize them as parts of a broken dynamic disk. Select the
object from the drop-down box and click the Connect button. R-Studio displays the objects it recognizes as the
components of the dynamic disk in blue.

Adding a component manually
You may immediately switch to the dynamic disk configuration that R-Studio believes most probable by clicking
the Reassemble button.
R-Studio shows dynamic disks with manually added components in blue:
Dynamic disks with added components in R-Studio
2.4.13.2 Windows Storage Spaces
Storage pools and spaces is a new storage technology, first introduced in Windows 8 and Windows Server
2012, that allows the user to combine various (not always similar) hard drives into a kind of a RAID or
compound volume. First, the hard drives are combined into a storage pool, then several storage spaces with
striping (similar to RAID0), mirroring (similar to RAID1), and parity (similar to RAID5) can be created in that
storage pool. You may read more about storage pools and spaces in the Microsoft's Storage Spaces: FAQ.
R-Studio supports Windows Storage Spaces created by Windows 8/8.1 and Windows 10/?Threshold 2/?
Anniversary/?Fall Creators updates.
When drives from a storage pool are connected to a Windows computer, it automatically detects them and
assembles storage spaces accordingly.

133 R-Studio Manual
Storage spaces
Storage pools and spaces can be managed using the Storage Spaces item in the Control Panel.
Storage spaces
R-Studio detects disks (or their images) from storage pools and creates storage pools and spaces automatically.
At the same time, R-Studio gives access to the parents of the storage spaces (hard drives and images).

Storage spaces in R-Studio
If recognized parents of a storage space, including disk images, are added to R-Studio later, it automatically
adds them to their respective storage space.
When an automatically created storage space is selected, R-Studio highlights its components. It also highlights
the storage space that Windows may itself create from the same components.
R-Studio shows the components of the selected storage space on its WSS Components tab.
WSS Components tab
R-Studio shows broken storage spaces in pink.

135 R-Studio Manual
Broken storage spaces in R-Studio
The WSS Components tab also allows you to manually disconnect or connect the components, for example, if
they are such damaged that R-Studio cannot recognize them as parts of a broken storage space. Select the
components of the storage space in blue.
You may immediately switch to the storage space configuration that R-Studio believes most probable by
clicking the Reassemble button.
R-Studio shows storage spaces with manually added components in blue:
Storage spaces with added parents in R-Studio
2.4.13.3 Apple RAIDs
OS X can create several software RAIDs from disks connected to a Mac computer: RAID1 (Mirror set),
RAID0 (Stripe set), and Concatenated disk set.

Apple RAID0 example
R-Studio detects components of Apple RAID sets and creates their virtual RAIDs automatically. At the same
time, R-Studio gives access to the individual components of the Apple RAID sets (hard drives and images).
Apple RAIDs in R-Studio
If recognized components of an Apple RAID, including disk images, are added to R-Studio later, it
automatically adds them to their respective Apple RAID.
When an automatically created Apple RAID is selected, R-Studio highlights its components.
R-Studio shows the components of the Apple RAID on its MacOS Components tab.

137 R-Studio Manual
MacOS Components tab
R-Studio shows broken Apple RAIDs in pink.

Broken Apple RAIDs in R-Studio
The MacOS Components tab also allows you to manually disconnect or connect the components, for example, if
they are such damaged that R-Studio cannot recognize them as parts of a broken Apple RAID. Select the
components of the Apple RAID in blue.
You may immediately switch to the Apple RAID configuration that R-Studio believes most probable by clicking
the Reassemble button.
R-Studio shows Apple RAIDs with manually added components in blue:

Apple RAIDs with added components in R-Studio
2.4.13.4 Apple CoreStorage/File Vault/Fusion Drive Volumes
The macOS operating system has the following disk management systems:
File Vault, is a disk encrypted utility;
Fusion Drive is an Apple's hybrid drive technology;
CoreStorage is a logical volume management system.
R-Studio supports all these technologies and can unlock their encrypted volumes (hard drives and images).
Locked CoreStorage Volume in R-Studio

139 R-Studio Manual
To unlock the volume

1. Right-click the encrypted volume and select Unlock encrypted drive on the shortcut menu.
2. Enter the password on the Unlock encrypted drive dialog box
> R-Studio will unlock the volume

Unlocked CoreStorage Volume in R-Studio
If the volume is partially encrypted, R-Studio can recognize which part is encrypted and which isn't. It will
provide a correct access to the unencrypted and encrypted parts of the volume, provided that the correct
password is entered.
Partially encrypted volume
2.4.13.5 Linux mdadm RAIDs
mdadm is a Linux utility used to manage and monitor software RAID devices.
R-Studio supports such devices and when drives from a mdadm RAID are connected to a Windows computer,
it automatically detects them and assembles mdadm RAIDs accordingly.
Linux mdadm RAIDs
R-Studio detects components from mdadm RAIDs and creates those RAIDs automatically. At the same time,
R-Studio gives access to the components of those RAIDs (hard drives and images).

mdadm RAIDs in R-Studio
If recognized components of a mdadm RAID, including disk images, are added to R-Studio later, it
automatically adds them to their respective mdadm RAID.
When an automatically created mdadm RAID is selected, R-Studio highlights its components.
R-Studio shows the components of the mdadm RAIDs on its mdadm Components tab.
mdadm Components tab
R-Studio shows broken mdadm RAIDs in pink.

Broken mdamd RAIDs in R-Studio
The mdadm Components tab also allows you to manually disconnect or connect the components, for example, if
they are such damaged that R-Studio cannot recognize them as parts of a broken mdadm RAID. Select the

141 R-Studio Manual
components of the mdadm RAID in blue.
You may immediately switch to the mdadm RAID configuration that R-Studio believes most probable by
R-Studio shows mdadm RAIDs with manually added components in blue:
mdadm RAIDs with added components in R-Studio
2.4.13.6 Linux LVM/LVM2
Linux LVM is a logical volume manager for the Linux OS that manages disk drives and other data storage
devices. Using it, It is possible to create single logical volumes on several physical disks, add and replace them in
a running system, resize logical volumes, create various RAID configuration, and so on. You may read more
about Linux LVM on this Wikipedia article: Logical Volume Manager (Linux).

LVM volume example
R-Studio detects disks from LVMs and creates their virtual volumes automatically. At the same time, R-Studio
gives access to the components of the virtual LVM volumes (hard drives and images).
LVM Volumes in R-Studio
If recognized components of an LVM volume, including disk images, are added to R-Studio later, it
automatically adds them to their respective LVM volume.
When an automatically created LVM volume is selected, R-Studio highlights its components.
R-Studio shows the components of the LVM volume on its LVM Components tab.
LVM Components tab
R-Studio shows broken virtual LVM volumes in pink.

Broken LVM volumes in R-Studio

143 R-Studio Manual
The LVM Components tab also allows you to manually disconnect or connect the components, for example, if
they are such damaged that R-Studio cannot recognize them as parts of a broken LVM volume. Select the
components of the LVM volume in blue.
You may immediately switch to the LVM volume configuration that R-Studio believes most probable by
R-Studio shows virtual LVM volumes with manually added components in blue:
LVM volumes with added components in R-Studio
2.5 Data Recovery over Network

This chapter explains how to perform data recovery operations over network.
R-Studio has network capabilities that allow the system administrator, using its computer, to recover files on any
computers accessible over network.
R-Studio supports the TCP/IP protocol and any protocol supported in Microsoft Network.
R-Studio Agent must be installed on computers where files are to be recovered. This program gives R-Studio
access to local disks on remote computers over network.
If, due to file system crash, the network computer where you are going to recover your data cannot start, you
may use R-Studio Agent Emergency to start the computer.

Files can be recovered without R-Studio Agent if the computer where the files are to be recovered runs
Windows is accessible from a computer also running Windows. In this case, the administrator must have
administrator privileges on the remote computer.
You should always disable a firewall and/or antivirus software on the both computers. As an alternative,
advanced users may tune them to allow R-Studio and R-Studio Agent to communicate via network.
All data transmitted over network are encrypted with a strong algorithm for data security. Restoring data over
network is very much the same as that on a local computer.
In addition, R-Studio can load/?save any files like disk images, scan info files, RAID configuration files, from/to
the computers to which it has access using R-Studio Agent.
· R-Studio Agent
· Data Recovery over Network
· Connecting over the Internet
2.5.1 R-Studio Agent
R-Studio Agent is a program that provides R-Studio with an access to the drives of a network computer. It
should be installed and properly registered on the computer which drives are to be accessed. R-Studio Agent
has versions for the following PC operating systems:
· Windows
· Mac OS
· Linux
and there is R-Studio Agent Emergency that can be used to start a computer from which you are going to
recover data that cannot start other way due to a file system crash, for example. Please, note that you need to
use R-Studio Emergency as an emergency agent if you want to start a Mac computer.
R-Studio can work equally with all versions of R-Studio Agent and access computers run under Windows,
Mac OS, and Linux.
You must have enough rights on the remote computer to install and run R-Studio Agent.
2.5.1.1 R-Studio Agent for Windows
R-Studio Agent should be installed under an administrator account.

When installed, R-Studio Agent starts automatically and runs as a service. To configure it, R-Studio Agent
should be started again manually.
The following switches are available:
-? evokes a help screen;
-install installs R-Studio Agent as a service
-remove removes R-Studio Agent services
-console starts R-Studio Agent as a console application
Started without a switch, R-Studio Agent runs as a GUI application and its icon appears on the taskbar tray. In
this mode, it can be configured and its log may be viewed.
Simply connect to the remote computer providing a desired password for R-Studio Agent in the Connect to
Remote Computer dialog box. R-Studio checks if there is R-Studio Agent running on this computer. If not, a
Can't connect... message will appear.

145 R-Studio Manual
Click the Yes button, and R-Studio will remotely install R-Studio Agent.
Attention Windows users: R-Studio Agent may be remotely installed over a network from a computer
running Windows to another computer running Windows. To do so, you must have administrator
accounts on both computers.
To access the R-Studio Agent main panel,
1 Click its tray icon
> The main panel will appear. You may view its log
R-Studio Agent main panel
To configure R-Studio Agent ,

1 Right-click its tray icon and select Configure
2 Specify required parameters on the Please configure R-Studio Agent dialog box and click the OK
button
Please configure R-Studio Agent dialog box
R-Studio Agent Options

Password: Enter a password to obtain access to this computer from a network.
Re-Enter: Re-enter the password.
Accepted Protocols
Pipes supported by Windows. To improve security, this option should be disabled.
TCP/IP supported by any network OS.
Port port for incoming connections
Accepted IP Addresses
IP Address specifies addresses from which this computer can be accessed.
Subnet Mask specifies a subnet mask of the network from which this computer can be accessed.
> R-Studio Agent will now run with the specified parameters

2.5.1.2 R-Studio Agent for Mac
You need to have an administrative account on the Mac computer to start R-Studio Agent for Mac.
To start the R-Studio Agent for Mac and access its main panel,
1 Go to the Application folder, double-click R-Studio Agent for Mac, and enter the account password
> The main panel will appear. You may view its log
R-Studio Agent for Mac main panel
To configure R-Studio Agent for Mac,

1 Go to the R-Studio Agent for Mac menu and select Preferences
2 Specify required parameters on the Please configure R-Studio Agent dialog box and click the OK
button
Please configure R-Studio Agent Mac dialog box
R-Studio Agent for Mac Options

Re-Enter: Re-enter the password.
Incoming connection preferences
Enable incoming Select this checkbox if you want to allow incoming connections.
connections
TCP/IP Port A TCP/IP port for incoming connections
Accepted IP Addresses
Subnet Mask specifies a subnet mask of the network from which this computer can be accessed.
> R-Studio Agent for Mac will now run with the specified parameters
Connecting from R-Studio Agent for Mac to R-Studio.
To establish a connection from R-Studio Agent for Mac to R-Studio,
1 Run the R-Studio Agent for Mac and select Connect from the Tools menu

147 R-Studio Manual
2 Enter the necessary information on the Connect to R-Studio dialog box and click the Connect button.
Connect to R-Studio dialog box
Connect to R-Studio settings

Server Specify the DNS name or IP address of the host where R-Studio is
running.
Port Specify the port set on the R-Studio Connect to Remote Computer
dialog box.
Password Specify the password set on the R-Studio Connect to Remote
Computer dialog box.
> R-Studio Agent for Mac will connect to the computer where R-Studio is running and it will show the
hard drive and logical disk structure of the remote computer.
It can be processed the same way as that on a local computer.

2.5.1.3 R-Studio Agent for Linux
You need to have the root privileges to run R-Studio Agent for Linux.
Unlike R-Studio Agent for Windows and R-Studio Agent for Mac, R-Studio Agent for Linux is a console application and
should be run in the Terminal. You also need to mark it as an executable before start.
When it is started for the first time, R-Studio Agent for Linux asks for its configuration.
R-Studio Agent for Linux Configuration dialog box
R-Studio Agent for Linux Options

Specify password Enter a password to obtain access to this computer from a network.
for incoming
connection
Confirm password Re-enter the password for confirmation.
for incoming
connection
Specify IP Specifies addresses and a subnet mask from which this computer can be accessed.
address... Enter 0 to allow connections from any address.
Specify TCP/IP Port A TCP/IP port for incoming connections. Press Enter for the default one [3174].
for listening
Don't pay much attention to the warning about "unregistered demo version". If necessary, you'll be able to
register R-Studio Agent for Linux through R-Studio.
You may see the current configuration by starting R-Studio Agent for Linux with the command rsagent --
show_config .
R-Studio Agent for Linux Configuration dialog box
You may change the current configuration by starting R-Studio Agent for Linux with the command rsagent --
configure .
Connecting from R-Studio Agent for Linux to R-Studio.

To establish a connection from R-Studio Agent for Linux to R-Studio,
1 Run the R-Studio Agent for Linux and press Enter
2 Enter the necessary information
> R-Studio Agent for Linux will connect to the computer where R-Studio is running and it will show the
hard drive and logical disk structure of the remote computer.

149 R-Studio Manual

2.5.2 Data Recovery over Network
Generally, data restoring over network is very much the same as that on a local computer.
R-Studio Agent should be running on the network computer where data are to be recovered.
Read the Connecting over the Internet topic to learn how to establish connection between R-Studio and
R-Studio Agent over the Internet.
To connect to a remote computer
1 Click the Connect to Remote button or select Connect To Remote on the Drive menu and select
Connect to the remote computer
A list of nearby computers will appear in the Computer List on the Connect to Remote Computer dialog
box.
Connect to Remote Computer dialog box
2 Select a computer from the list on the Connect to Remote Computer dialog box and enter the
password
Otherwise, you need to specify in the Computer: field the name or IP address of the remote computer where
data are to be recovered. The Port should coincide with the port specified for the R-Studio Agent.
The Password: field is for the password of R-Studio Agent running on the remote computer. If you want to
see the entered password, right-click the field and select Show password on the shortcut menu.
Note: If the remote computer is started with R-Studio Agent Emergency, leave this field blank.

> R-Studio will connect to the remote computer and show its hard drive and logical disk structure of the
remote computer below the device/?
disk structure of your local computer

Recover dialog box
When the Recover dialog box appears, you may select whether you want to save recovered files on the local
or remote computer. Saving recovered files on a remote computer may be useful when the remote computer
has a healthy disk because you do not have to transfer files over network. It may be an external USB hard
drive, for example.
When R-Studio connects to the remote computer, it check if R-Studio Agent is present and its password.
If there is no R-Studio Agent installed, R-Studio may try to remotely install it. See the R-Studio Agent
topic for details.
2.5.3 Connecting over the Internet
R-Studio and R-Studio Agent can be connected over the Internet. The connection can be made either using IP
addresses or DNS names.
If hosts where R-Studio and R-Studio Agent are running have public IP addresses the connection can be made the
same way as for the local network, except that the IP address or DNS name should be explicitly specified in the
Computer filed the Connect to Remote Computer dialog box
If either (or both) of the hosts are on private networks behind NATs and firewalls and do not have public IP
addresses, the corresponding ports should be opened or forwarded. In addition, connection should be made
either only from R-Studio or from R-Studio Agent.

151 R-Studio Manual
Connection directions
* Both R-Studio and R-Studio Agent have public IP addresses (no NAT/?
firewall) or the ports on the NAT/?
firewall are forwarded/?
opened.
A connection can be made either from R-Studio or from R-Studio Agent.

* R-Studio is behind a NAT and R-Studio Agent has a public IP address or the ports on its NAT/?firewall are
forwarded/?
opened.
A connection should be made from R-Studio.

* R-Studio has a public IP address or the ports on its NAT/?firewall are forwarded/?opened and R-Studio Agent
is behind a NAT.
A connection should be made from R-Studio Agent.

* Both R-Studio and R-Studio Agent are behind NATs/?firewalls.
No connections are possible.

Connection from R-Studio Agent to R-Studio
R-Studio settings
If a connection is to be made from R-Studio Agent to R-Studio, R-Studio should be set to accept connection
on the Connect to Remote Computer dialog box.

153 R-Studio Manual
Connect to Remote Computer dialog box
Select Wait connection from remote computer, and specify options for incoming connections.
R-Studio Incoming Connection Options
Allow connection Select this option if you want to allow connections to R-Studio from any IP address
from any address
Allow connection Select this option if you want to allow connections to R-Studio from a specific IP
from the host address or a network
Subnet Mask specifies subnet mask of the network from which this computer can be accessed.
Port port for incoming connections.
R-Studio will wait for an incoming connection.
Waiting for remote connection dialog box

Connecting from R-Studio Agent to R-Studio.

To establish a connection from R-Studio Agent to R-Studio,
(See the R-Studio Agent for Mac or R-Studio Agent for Linux help page to learn how to establish
connections from those R-Studio Agent versions).
1 Right-click the R-Studio Agent tray icon and select Connect
2 Enter the necessary information on the Connect to R-Studio dialog box and click the Connect button.
Connect to R-Studio settings

Server Specify the DNS name or IP address of the host where R-Studio is
running.
Port Specify the port set on the R-Studio Connect to Remote Computer
dialog box.
Password Specify the password set on the R-Studio Connect to Remote
Computer dialog box.
> R-Studio Agent will connect to the computer where R-Studio is running and it will show the hard
drive and logical disk structure of the remote computer.
III Text/hexadecimal Editor

Any object visible to R-Studio can be viewed and edited in the Text/?hexadecimal editor. It is also able to
parse the data and represent data according to various data patterns. You may also create your own patterns to
parse data.
You may turn numerical indexes for objects to distinguish them better.
· Viewing and Editing Objects

· Navigating through an Object
· Data Copy
· Files and Sectors

155 R-Studio Manual
· Creating Custom Patterns

· Pattern Example I
· Pattern Example II
R-Studio Features
Basic File Recovery
Mass File Recovery
R-Studio Emergency
3.1 Viewing and Editing Objects
YOU MUST BE ABSOLUTELY SURE OF WHAT AND WHERE YOU ARE WRITING!
Or you may completely lose all your data.
Before you can physically write anything on a disk, you need to enable writing.
To enable writing,
1 On the R-Studio main panel, select the Tools menu, then Settings, and select Enable Write on the
Settings dialog box.
> The Editable: status will change to Yes from Read Only.
Now the object can be edited.
Locking and unlocking objects
It is possible to manually lock an object being edited in Text/??hexadecimal Editor.
When an object is locked, Text/??hexadecimal Editor has an exclusive access to it, and no other programs or
Windows can make any changes on it. Text/??hexadecimal Editor itself always locks the object itself before
writing anything on the disk and then unlocks it. But sometimes locking/??unlocking may take quite a lot of time, up
to several seconds. That is why sometimes it is a good practice to lock an object while editing it in Text/?
hexadecimal Editor. This can be done by selecting Lock on the Tools menu.
When considering locking an object in Text/?hexadecimal Editor, keep in mind the following:
· Starting from Windows 7, it is impossible to change data if it resides on a logical disk without locking the
disk. If the data is on a place outside of any logical disk (on an unmounted partition or empty space), such
lock is not necessary. Windows Vista, XP, or below do not have such restrictions.
· The Lock command tries to lock all logical disks on which the object being edited is placed. For a hard
drive, those are all its logical disks, for a file that is a logical disk where it resides. And if a RAID is created
from logical disks and a file is opened on that RAID, Text/?hexadecimal Editor blocks all logical disks on
which the file resides.
Moreover:
· If a logical disk is opened in Text/? hexadecimal Editor, the Lock command locks the disk if there is no files
opened by some other programs.
Text/hexadecimal Editor 156
· If a hard drive is opened in Text/?

hexadecimal Editor, the Lock command locks the drive if all its logical
disks can be locked. That may cause problems is one of the logical disks is a system one.
To view/?
e dit an object,
1 Right-click the object and select View/?
Edit on the shortcut menu
Other ways to view/?
edit the object
· Select the object and select View/?
Edit on the File menu
or
· Select the object and press the Ctrl+E keys
> A Text/?
hexadecimal Editor panel will appear
R-Studio Text/?
hexadecimal editor

157 R-Studio Manual
Data Parsed According to the Selected Pattern Object Properties
Object Sector Mapping Data Shown as Various Digits
Binary view

Text view
Find Results
List of Bookmarks
Text/?
hexadecimal Editor status
Previous Pattern
Click this button to go to the previous pattern.
Next Pattern
Click this button to go to the next pattern.
Save Changes
Click this button to save changes.
Code pages
Turns supported code pages on/off.
Autoflow
Click this button to turn autoflow on.
Panel view options

You may set which panels and bars to enable/?disable.

159 R-Studio Manual
To enable/?
disable:
ANSI data Select/?clear ANSI on the View menu
OEM data Select/?clear OEMr on the View menu
UNICODE data Select/?clear UNICODE on the View menu
UNICODE+ data Select/?clear UNICODE+ on the View menu
Toolbar Select/?clear Toolbar on the View menu
Properties View Select/?clear Properties View on the View menu
Sectors View Select/?clear Sectors View on the View menu
Data Interpreter Select/?clear Data Interpreter View on the View menu
View
Template View Select/?clear Template View on the View menu
Bookmarks View Select/?clear Bookmarks View on the View menu
Find Results View Select/?clear Find Results View on the View menu
2 View the information and make necessary changes
Select Save Changes on the Tools menu if you want to save changes.
Other ways to save changes
· Select Save Changes on the File menu
or
· Press the Ctrl+S keys
Viewing
There are up to four tabs showing the data in different representations. Actual number of tabs depends on the
object and property being viewed/?edited.
Std Exact attribute data. If the attribute is compressed, R-Studio decompresses it prior to
showing.
Unlimited Exact attribute data + free space of last cluster. If the attribute is compressed, R-Studio
decompresses it prior to showing.
Direct Actual data written on the disk. If the attribute is not compressed, it coincides with the Std
representation.
Allocation Resident part of the attribute.
You may view data in 4 various code pages: ANSI/?OEM/?UNICODE/?UNICODE+ by switching on/off the
respective code pages in the Code pages buttons or select the appropriate code pages on the View menu.
You may see which file is written on a particular sector. See Files and Sectors for details.
Patterns or Templates
You may select a pattern according to which the data will be parsed and shown in the parsed data pane. The
Data Interpreter shows the data selected on the Template pane in various representations.
You may find the next or previous data that matches the pattern signature on the disk. Right-click the right
pane of the editor and select either Find Template Signature Next or Find Template Signature Previous
on the shortcut menu. You may also select these items on the Edit menu.
You may also create your own patterns to parse data from various objects.

Navigating
Text/?hexadecimal Editor gives you various ways to navigate into an object. See the Navigating through
an Object for more details.
Data Copy
Text/?hexadecimal Editor gives you various ways to copy selected data navigate in an object. See the Data
Copy for more details.
Filling an area with a pattern
To fill an area with a pattern, select Fill on the Edit menu, and specify the pattern and area on the Fill dialog
box.
Fill dialog box
Fill options
Fill pattern
HEX Field for the pattern to fill the area in the hexadecimal representation
ANSI Field for the pattern to fill the area in the ANSI encoding
OEM Field for the pattern to fill the area in the OEM encoding
UNICODE Field for the pattern to fill the area in the UNICODE encoding
Fill range
From (hex) Field for the start position of the area to fill with the pattern
To (hex) Field for the end position of the area to fill with the pattern
3 Click the Save Changes button to save the changes
Other ways to save the changes made
· Select Save Changes on the Edit menu
or
· Press the F2 key
> Viewer/?
Editor will save the changes on the object
YOU MUST BE ABSOLUTELY SURE OF WHAT AND WHERE YOU ARE WRITING!
Or you may completely lose all your data.
Selecting and saving an area in theViewer/?
Editor
You may select an area in the Viewer/??Editor panel and save it as a file.
To select and save an area in the Viewer/?Editor panel,
1 Right-click the beginning of the selection and select Select From on the shortcut menu
2 Right-click the end of the selection and select Select To on the shortcut menu
Other ways to select an area
· Select Select... on the Tools menu and specify an area to select on the Select dialog box,

161 R-Studio Manual
or
· Click the start point of the area and drag the mouse cursor to its end.
If you need to select an entire object, select Select All on the Tools menu or click the Ctrl+A key
Select dialog box
3 Select an appropriate item in the Tools menu to save the data in a required format and specify its file
name
Select:
Save to Binary File... to save the data in the binary format (default extension is .bin)
Save to Hexadecimal to save the data in the binary format (default extension is .hex)
File
on the Tools menu.
If you select an existing file, R-Studio will ask you if you want to append or overwrite the file.
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Save as... dialog box will
appear when you select a place to save the data. You may save it to the local or remote computer.
> Viewer/?
Editor will save the data in the file
Loading data from an external file

You may load a data from a file and overwrite an area of the object opened in the Viewer/?Editor panel.
To load binary data from a file and overwrite an area of the object opened in the Viewer/?Editor
panel,
1 Select an area to overwrite and select Load from File... on the Tools menu
If a remote computer is connected for Data Recovery over Network, the Open as Binary File dialog box
will appear when you select a place to open the data file from. You may open it from the local or remote
computer.
2 Select the necessary file and load the data.

> The area in the Viewer/?
Editor will be overwritten with the new data.
3.2 Navigating through an Object

Navigating
You may quickly move to a particular part of the object. To move to a particular part of the object being
viewed/?edited, enter the required offset in the Go to Offset field between the buttons.

Type an offset to which you want to go. You may select between bytes and sectors. See the Data Formats
and Multipliers topic for more details on data formats.
If a file is opened in Text/?
hexadecimal Editor , you may select data representation for that file.
You may also use the Go To Offset dialog box to go to a specified place in the object. Click the Offset field
on the Status bar. You may also use this dialog box to copy the offset.
Go To Offset dialog box
Go To Offset options
From: Jump/?offset direction. For example, if you need to find the offset from the object end
for a selected byte, switch to the End (backward) option.
HEX/DEC Switch between the hexadecimal and decimal data representation.
Range Range of values that can be entered.
dec/hex: Alternative data representation.
Offset: Flat data offset (without separation between the sector and offset in the sector).
Sector/?offset Data offset represented as a sector and offset in the sector.
Go!/OK buttons The Go! button moves the cursor to the specified positions, but the Go To Offset
dialog box remains open. The OK button closes the dialog box after moving the
cursor.
Searching
To search for a particular string, click the Find, Find Next, or Find Previous buttons or the same items on
the Edit menu, and specify the string on the Search dialog box.
Search dialog box
Search options
Not Equal Search for the place which content is not equal to the string. For
example, the first byte not equal to 00 or FF.

163 R-Studio Manual
Search for
HEX Field for the string to search for in the hexadecimal
representation
ANSI Field for the string to search for in the ANSI encoding
OEM Field for the string to search for in the OEM encoding
UNICODE Field for the string to search for in the UNICODE encoding
Match case Select this check box to make the search case-sensitive
Search area
From current position Select this check box to start search from the current position
From start position Select this check box to start search from the beginning of the
object
From Address Select this check box and specify the range in which the search
is to be carried out
Search position
Exhaustive search Select this check box to search the entire object
Search at offset Select this check box and specify the sector offset from which
the search will start
Reverse Select this check box to start the search in the reverse direction
Find all Select this check box to search for all instances of the string to
search. Search results will be shown in the Find Results pane.
Text/??hexadecimal Editor will show the search progress.
Search results are shown on the Find Results pane. You may easily move to the required found item by
clicking the item.
Features of the Not Equal option
Suppose we have an object which first 3 consecutive sectors start with:
Sector1 FILEAAAAA..............................................
Sector2 FILEBBBBB..............................................
Sector3 NOTAFILE...............................................
And the search string is Not Equal FILE.
If the Exhaustive search option is selected, the Text/?hexadecimal Editor will stop at the first A character in
Sector1.
If the Search at offset=0 option is selected, the Text/?hexadecimal Editor will stop at the N character in
Sector3.
Bookmarking
You may create bookmarks to easily move to those places. Right-click the cursor on the place you want to
bookmark and select Toggle Bookmark on the shortcut menu. The list of bookmarks appears in the
Bookmark pane. You may easily move to the required bookmark by clicking it in the list.
You may control bookmarks on the Edit menu.
3.3 Data Copy
Text/?hexadecimal Editor gives you various ways to copy selected data navigate in an object.
Data selected in Text/?
hexadecimal Editor

Depending on what column you have control-clicked, the following commands are available in the shortcut menu:
Data pasted into a text editor
When right-clicking any column

Copy Editor Display

When right-clicking any column
Copy as File Signature

When right-clicking the Binary data
column
Copy as "Binary data"

When right-clicking the ANSI column
Copy as "ANSI"

When rightl-clicking the UNICODE
column
Copy as "UNICODE"
3.4 Files and Sectors

You may see which file is written on a particular sector. To do so:
1 Enumerate files on a logical disk on the Drives panel.
2 Go to the tab of that logical disk and select Show Files in HexEditor on the Files menu.
3 Return to the Drives panel and select View/?
Edit on the shortcut menu.
> R-Studio will show a file that belongs to a particular section.

165 R-Studio Manual
File in a sector
3.5 Creating Custom Patterns

You may create your own patterns yourself.
An example of a commented pattern parsing an AVI file.
The syntax of pattern description is similar to that of the XML language. The folder where the files should be
placed is specified on the Main tab of the Settings dialog box.
Pattern structure
Pattern header
Each pattern starts with a standard header
Section template
Each pattern starts with a section giving to the pattern a name that will be shown in the parsed data pane.
Attributes:
name Specifies the pattern name shown in the parsed data pane
Example:
<template name="AVI File LIST">
........
</template>
Section signature
Attributes:
align <positive Specifies if the data structure address is aligned (i.g., by a sector: 512)
integer>
This section contains elements field with hex-codes of the signature. The attribute offset specifies their
offset from the start of the record. Field length is equal to the number of hex-codes.
Example:
<signature align="1">
<field offset="0">46 49</field>
<field offset="2">4c 45</field>
</signature>
Section section
Such sections contain all expressions and operations needed for the pattern to parse the data. A section name is
shown in the parsed data pane. In fact, sections are virtual objects used to group logically connected fields.
Sections can be nested.

The main section is not shown in the parsed data pane.

Section contain elements field which are actual data objects. field names are shown in the parsed data pane
with their values.
Attributes:
name Specifies the pattern name shown in the parsed data pane
Example:
<section name="JUNK">
....
</section>
List of All Objects in Patterns
Data types (in field)
· integer
Sub-types:
int8
int16
int32
int64
uint8
uint16
uint32
uint64
uintX
Attributes:
endian: (be | le Optional. Default: system.
| system)
base: (decimal | Optional. Specifies data representation. Default: decimal.
hex | octal)
as-offset: Optional. Specifies that this field is an offset and its value should be evaluated using
<expression> the expression. A special variable this returns the value of this field.
purpose: (offset Optional. Specifies the type of the as-offset expression result . If this attribute is
| rsector | present, the attribute is necessary if the offset value should differ from the value of
sector | cluster
this field (variable this ).
| rcluster)
rsector and rcluster are offsets relative to the absolute position of the pattern
beginning.
assigned- Specifies the pattern name linked with this field. Ignored if the as-offset or
template: purpose attributes are not specified.
<TemplateName>
var: <Name> Optional. Specifies the name under which the value of this field can be accessed in
expressions.
· binary
Attributes:

167 R-Studio Manual
display-encoding: Optional. Default: hex.

(hex | binary)
size: <bytes> Mandatory.
· char
Attributes:
codepage: (ansi | Optional. Specifies which codepage is used. Default: ansi.
oem | utf8 | utf16)
· filetime
Shows time in the Win32 format (64 bits)
· unixtime
Shows time in the Unix format (seconds from 01/01/1970)
· filetime
Shows time in the DOS format (date: hiword, time: loword)
· bits
Attributes:
pos: <comma Mandatory. Specifies bit positions in a data block.
separated list of
bit positions>
Commands
· goto
Specifies a jump to a specified offset (either absolute or relative one)
Attributes:
address: Specifies an absolute address to jump to.
<expression>
offset: <expression> Specifies a relative offset to jump by.
One and only one of the attributes should always be specified.
· if
Evaluates a condition specified in the test attribute and, if the condition is true, reads fields specified in this
tag.
Attribute:
test: <expression> Sets a condition to test against.
· repeat

Reads the fields specified in the tag until the exit condition is equal to 0 or specified times
Attributes:
count: <expression> <expression> is evaluated one time upon entering the block. Internal
elements are read the specified number of times.
test: <expression> <expression> is evaluated upon entering the block. Similar to the C++
construction while(...) {}.
test: <expression> <expression> is evaluated upon exiting the block. Similar to the C++
construction do {} while(...).
· setvar
Sets the value of an internal variable. As an example, this command is convenient to store the current offset.
The value of the current offset is stored in a predefined variable offset.
Attributes:
var: <string> Specifies the name of the variable.
expr: <expression> Specifies an expression which result will be assigned to the variable.
Expressions
Expressions in the patterns are arithmetic expressions which syntax is similar to that of the C language, including
operation preceding.
The following operations are supported:
+ - * / & | > < <= >= != == || &&
Predefined variables
· offset
An offset in bytes from the pattern beginning data is currently read at.
· start_position
An absolute position of the pattern beginning. offset + start_position = absolute offset.
· this
This variable exists only within the context of the ass-offset expression evaluation and is the current value
of the data field for which that expression is specified
3.6 Pattern Example I
Below is an example of a commented pattern parsing an AVI file.

<template name="AVI File">


<field offset="0x00">52 49 46 46</field> 
<field offset="0x08">41 56 49 20</field> 

169 R-Studio Manual
</signature>

<section name="AVI File">

<field type="char" size="4" name="Signature: RIFF" var="signature"/>

<goto offset="-4"/>

<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Signature RIFF as unsigned integer in hex
format" var="signature"/>


<if test="signature == 0x46464952"> 

<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data in file" var="dataSize"/>

<setvar var="endOfFile" expr="offset + dataSize - 8"/>

<field type="char" size="4" name="File type"/>


<section name="DATA">

<setvar var="chunksOffset" expr="start_position"/>

<repeat test="endOfFile > offset">

<field type="char" size="4" name="Signature"/>

<goto offset="-4"/>

<field type="uint32" name="Signature as unsigned integer"
var="signature"/>



<if test="signature == 1414744396"> 

<section name="LIST">

<goto offset="-4"/>

<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Signature LIST as unsigned
integer in hex format" as-offset="start_position + offset - 4" assigned-
template="AVI File LIST"/>

<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data in the list"
var="listSize"/>

<field type="char" size="4" name="List type"/>

<goto offset="-4"/>

<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="List type as unsigned integer in
hex format" var="listType"/>


<if test="listType == 0x69766f6d"> 

<setvar var="chunksOffset" expr="start_position + offset - 4"/>
</if>

<goto address="offset + listSize - 4"/>
</section>
</if>


<if test="signature == 1263424842"> 

<section name="JUNK">


171 R-Studio Manual
<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data of the junk"

var="junkSize"/>

<goto offset="junkSize"/>
</section>
</if>


<if test="signature == 829973609"> 

<section name="idx1">

<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data of the idx1"
var="idxSize"/>

<section name="First AVIINDEXENTRY">

<field type="char" size="4" name="Chunck id"/>

<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Flags"/>

<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Chunk offset" as-
offset="chunksOffset + this"/>

<field type="uint32" name="Chunk size"/>
</section>

<goto offset="idxSize"/>
</section>
</if>

<if test="signature != 1414744396 && signature != 1263424842
&& signature != 829973609">

<section name="Unknown signature found">
</section>

<goto address="endOfFile"/>
</if>

</repeat>
</section>
</if>
</section>
</template>
3.7 Pattern Example II

<template name="AVI File LIST">

<field offset="0x00">4C 49 53 54</field> 
</signature>

<section name="AVI File LIST">

<field type="char" size="4" name="Signature: LIST"/>

<goto offset="-4"/>

<field type="uint32" name="Signature LIST as unsigned integer" var="signature"/>


<if test="signature == 1414744396"> 

<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data in the list" var="listSize"/>
<setvar var="endOfList" expr="offset + listSize"/>
<field type="char" size="4" name="List type"/>

<goto offset="-4"/>
<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="List type as unsigned integer in hex
format" var="listType"/>


<if test="listType == 0x69766f6d"> 


173 R-Studio Manual
<goto address="endOfList"/>
</if>
<setvar var="mediaType" expr="0"/>

<repeat test="endOfList > offset - 8">
<section name="CHUNK">
<field type="char" size="4" name="Chunk ID"/>
<goto offset="-4"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Chunk ID as unsigned integer" var="chunkId"/>
<if test="chunkId == 1414744396"> 
<goto offset="-4"/>
<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="LIST chunk ID as unsigned integer in hex
format" as-offset="start_position + offset - 4" assigned-template="AVI File LIST"/>
</if>
<field type="uint32" name="Size of the data in the chunk"

var="chunkSize"/>
<setvar var="endOfChunk" expr="offset + chunkSize"/>

<if test="endOfChunk & 1">
<setvar var="endOfChunk" expr="endOfChunk & 0xFFFFFFFE"/>
<setvar var="endOfChunk" expr="endOfChunk + 2"/>
</if>
<if test="chunkId == 1751742049"> 

<field type="uint32" name="Number of microseconds between frames"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Approximate maximum data rate of the file"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Alignment for data, in bytes"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Bitwise combination of zero or more of the
flags"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Total number of frames of data in the file"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Initial frame for interleaved files"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Number of streams in the file"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Suggested buffer size for reading the file"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Width of the AVI file in pixels"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Height of the AVI file in pixels"/>
<field type="binary" size="16" name="Reserved"/>
</if>
<if test="chunkId == 1852994675"> 

<field type="char" size="chunkSize" name="Stream name"/>

</if>
<if test="chunkId == 1752331379"> 

<field type="char" size="4" name="Type"/>
<goto offset="-4"/>
<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Type as unsigned integer in hex
format" var="type"/>
<setvar var="mediaType" expr="type"/>
<field type="char" size="4" name="Handler (codec)"/>
<field type="uint32" base="hex" name="Flags"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Number of the first block of the stream that
is present in the file"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Scale"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Rate"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Start time of stream"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Size of stream in units as defined in Rate
and Scale"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Size of buffer necessary to store blocks of
that stream"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Quality"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Sample size (number of bytes of one stream
atom)"/>
</if>
<if test="chunkId == 1718776947"> 

<if test="mediaType == 0x73646976"> 
<section name="BITMAPINFOHEADER">
<field type="uint32" name="Number of bytes required by the
structure"/>
<field type="int32" name="Width of the bitmap, in pixels"/>
<field type="int32" name="Height of the bitmap, in pixels"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Number of planes for the target device"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Number of bits-per-pixel"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Type of compression for a compressed
bottom-up bitmap"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Size, in bytes, of the image"/>
<field type="int32" name="Horizontal resolution, in pixels-per-
meter, of the target device for the bitmap"/>
<field type="int32" name="Vertical resolution, in pixels-per-meter,
of the target device for the bitmap"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Number of color indexes in the color
table that are actually used by the bitmap"/>

175 R-Studio Manual
<field type="uint32" name="Number of color indexes that are required

for displaying the bitmap"/>
</section>
</if>
<if test="mediaType == 0x73647561"> 

<section name="WAVEFORMATEX">
<field type="uint16" name="Waveform-audio format type"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Number of channels in the waveform-audio
data"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Sample rate, in samples per second
(hertz)"/>
<field type="uint32" name="Required average data-transfer rate, in
bytes per second, for the format tag"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Block alignment, in bytes"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Bits per sample for the Waveform-audio
format type"/>
<field type="uint16" name="Size, in bytes, of extra format
information appended to the end of the WAVEFORMATEX structure"/>
</section>
</if>
</if>
<goto address="endOfChunk"/>
</section>
</repeat>
</if>
<if test="signature != 1414744396">

<section name="Invalid LIST signature found">
</section>
</if>
</section>
</template>

IV Technical Information and Troubleshooting

This chapter covers various technical issues and troubleshooting.
· IntelligentScan technology
· Data Recovery Issues
· Extended Information Recovery
· Data Formats and Multipliers
· Data Recovery on HFS/HFS+ file system
· Bad Sectors
· File Information (R-Studio Technician)
· Memory Usage
· Forensic Mode
· R-Studio Switches
· Properties Tab
R-Studio Features
Basic File Recovery
Mass File Recovery
Text/?hexadecimal Editor
R-Studio Emergency
4.1 IntelligentScan Technology
R-Studio uses a unique IntelligentScan technology when it tries to recover the data on the area being
scanned.
While scanning the selected area, R-Studio reads data directly from the disk, analyzes them, and tries to
determine a record to which the data belong. The following record types are possible:
· MBR/GPT records
· NTFS Boot Sector, Folder, and MFT records
· FAT/exFAT Boot Sector, folder, and file records
· ReFS Boot sector records and ReFS Meta blocks
· HFS/HFS+ Volume headers and BTree+ nodes
· APFS Super blocks, APFS Volume blocks, and APFS nodes
· Ext2/3/4FS SuperBlocks records
· UFS/FFS SuperBlock records
· Specific file signatures of Known File types for raw file carving

177 R-Studio Manual
All these record types have different, but known, structure. Knowing valid values of record fields and relations
between them for each record type, R-Studio determines a record type for the data. If such record type cannot
be unambiguously determined, the data are assigned to the most probable record type. The same data can be
assigned to several record types, with a certain probability for each assignment. A list of possible files is
generated from these records.
R-Studio generates a record list for each record type. This list contains references to records assigned to a
record type from the list with their assignment probability. The same data can be included into different record
lists. Then R-Studio analyzes relations between elements in each list and between different lists, and generates a
list of found partitions with their parameters, such as partition start point and probable size, file system type,
cluster size, and existence probability.
Using the file list and partition list, R-Studio reconstructs file systems and files on the found partitions. One file
can be attributed to several different partitions.
When the entire disk or its part has been scanned, R-Studio shows all found partitions. Then the parameters of
the found partitions may be manually corrected, if additional information on them is available.
Using the IntelligentScan technology, R-Studio can recover files not only on new and existing partitions. It also
can find and recover data on partitions that have been deleted or reformatted. If, for example, there was an
NTFS partition, which later was reformatted as a FAT partition, R-Studio will show two partitions on the same
place on the disk, one having the FAT file system, the other the NTFS. Then, files found on those partitions can
be recovered.
The IntelligentScan technology makes R-Studio a very powerful data recovery tool, but it is not omnipotent.
As it uses probabilistic approach to data reconstruction, it cannot guarantee 100% correct results. Moreover,
even if R-Studio has reconstructed data structure correctly, it is impossible to guarantee that all found files will be
completely and correctly recovered, as new data may be already written over the old files. See the Data
Recovery Issues topic for details.
4.2 Data Recovery Issues
THEY RESIDE!!!
R-Studio writes directly to a hard drive only when writing recovered data and from its hex editor, if writing is
enabled. In all other actions, R-Studio only reads data and analyzes them, and never modifies data on the hard
drives being analyzed.
Most operating systems use lazy-write. So, there is a time lag between file actions and actual changes on data on
a hard drive. R-Studio analyzes data on hard drives only. That is why it does not always detect recent changes in
data structure.
Most operating systems constantly write their service information on hard drives. Such writing is especially
intensive during startup and shutdown procedures. When an operating system deletes a file/?folder, it treats the
space where it has resided as empty and may write something in this place. If this happened, the file/?folder and its
parameters may be detected correctly, but its data may be lost.
Folder names like $$$Folder58448 on NTFS partitions mean that the folder has not been found on the drive but
some references to it have been. For example, folders My documents, Work, Photos have been found and all they
have one parent folder, whose description has not actually been found on the disk, so its name is unknown and
therefore represented as $$$Folder58448. It may happen that the description of such folders was outside of the

Technical Information and Troubleshooting 178
scan area, so try to enlarge the region or scan the entire hard drive. If that does not help, most likely that the
description of the folder has been overwritten.
Folder names like $ROOT58448 on FAT partitions mean that some folders have been found, but they cannot
be included into the folder structure for this FAT partition. Sometimes, such folders may contain other folder
structures.
If you recover a file, and it appears that the file contains wrong data, try to do the following:
· Scan:
the logical disk, if the file has been just deleted.
the hard drive, if the data structure is damaged more seriously.
· Search for the file to be restored on all found partitions and try to recover it from all found partitions.
Check each recovered file to ensure that it contains correct data. As soon as you found the partition from
which the file is recovered correctly, use this partitions to recover all other deleted files.
If there are several deleted files to be restored, you should use a file larger than 2KB to select the required
partition.
FAT file system:
Cross-Linked Folders
Often R-Studio finds several FAT folder records that contain the same data. Such folders are called cross-
linked. R-Studio marks such folders with an arrow mark:
R-Studio attributes the content of cross-linked folders to one folder called a target folder. When recovering,
R-Studio places the content to the target folder.
To view the list of cross-linked folders,
1 Right-click a cross-linked folder and select Cross Linked Folders on the shortcut menu
> A list of cross-linked folders will appear
You may go to any folder in this list by clicking it.
To find a target folder,
* Right-click a cross-linked folder and select Go Target on the shortcut menu, or
Select the cross-linked folder and select Goto Target on the File menu
If Go Target is gray, this folder is already the target folder.
To set the target folder manually,
* Right-click a cross-linked folder and select Set As Default Target on the shortcut menu, or
Select the cross-linked folder and select Set As Default Target on the File menu.
If Set As Default Target is gray, this folder is already the target folder.
Questionable Folders
Sometimes, R-Studio may find FAT records, which look like folders, but their content is invalid. For example,
file names have invalid characters, date, time, and size, or other file attributes may look strange. Please note that
R-Studio correctly recognizes localized names. R-Studio treats such records as folders, but does not analyze
their content and structure. You can manually scan such folders, but results may be unpredictable. Usually, such
scan reveals garbage.
R-Studio marks such folders with a question mark.

179 R-Studio Manual
To re-scan an object,
* Right-click a questionable folder on the R-Studio's Folders panel and select Rescan on the shortcut
menu, or
Select the questionable folder and select Rescan on the File menu.
NTFS file system:
Symbolic links (symlinks)
Symbolic links (of symlinks) are file system objects that point to other file system objects (named targets). Those
objects are usually folders, but may be of any kind. R-Studio shows symlinks and targets using the following
icons:
A symlinked folder:
The target folder:
You may find a target or symlink for an object. Right-click the object and select Links on the shortcut menu.
Files:
Hard links
Hard links are file system entries that give file names to files. This term is usually used when files may have several
names. R-Studio shows hard links using the following icons:
A hard link:
The target file:
You may find a target or hard link for a file. Right-click the file and select Links on the shortcut menu.
4.3 Extended Information Recovery
R-Studio supports recovery of compressed files, alternative data streams, encrypted files, file security and
extended file attributes. If the R-Studio host OS and the file system of the disk you are going to save file to
support any particular extended information, it will be saved with the file, too. Otherwise, the extended
information will be saved as separate files with the same name as the restored file and extension showing the type
of the extended information. Below is a quick reference for the host OS and file system of the target drive.
Extended Information Required host OS Required target disk FS
Encrypted files Windows 2000/?XP/?2003/?Vista/? NTFS
2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10
Alternative data streams Windows NT/?2000/?XP/?2003/? NTFS
Vista/?2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10
File security Windows NT/?2000/?XP/?2003/? NTFS
Vista/?2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10
Extended file attributes Windows NT/?2000/?XP/?2003/? NTFS or FAT/exFAT
Vista/?2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10

4.4 Data Formats and Multipliers

You may enter data in all numerical fields either in sectors or in bytes. If there is no letters are after the number,
R-Studio assumes the numbers are in bytes.
Decimal numbers are entered as they are: 2372354
Hexadecimal numbers are entered as 0x23Fa67 or 23Fa67 hex.
The following case-insensitive notation is possible:
b 1 byte
kb 1 kb = 2^10=1024 bytes
mb 1 mb = 2^20=104857 bytes
gb 1 gb = 2^30=1073741824 bytes
tb 1 tb = 2^40=1099511627776 bytes
eb 1 eb = 2^50=1125899906842624 bytes
hex A hexadecimal number
sec A number is in sectors
(sector)
You may also slect the multipliers in the drop-down boxes.
Type an offset to which you want to go. You may select between bytes and sectors. See the Data Formats
and Multipliers topic for more details on data formats.
If a file is opened in Text/?
hexadecimal Editor , you may select data representation for that file.
When the multiplier has been changed, the data value will be changed according to the specific shortcut
commands for that field:
Suppose, the initial value is 1 GB, and the sector size of the object is 512 byte. The results will be the following:
Command: No recalculate
Change from GB to MB: 1
Change from GB to Sectors: 1
Command: Always recalculate
Command: Units type recalculate
4.5 Data Recovery on HFS/HFS+ File System

When deleting a file, Mac OS X deletes system BTree+ records describing the file. Therefore, it is hard to
recover such file directly. Those records may remain in:
1. The swap file (if the deleted file has been deleted recently).
2. In the journal (if the HFS+ journaling is on, and the deleted file has been CREATED recently)
Actually, if a file has been deleted, chances that the records would be found are small. To greatly increase the
chances to recover deleted files successfully , you may actively use scanning with enabled Known Files Types.

181 R-Studio Manual
Note: All above is correct for intentionally deleted files. In case of a corrupted file system, HFS/HFS+ can be
recovered quite successfully.
When recovering files with HFS+-specific attributes (resource fork, finder info, etc.), R-Studio saves it in the so-
called AppleDouble format. When they are copied to an HFS+ disk under Mac OS X, those attributes will be
automatically restored.
4.6 Bad Sectors
Quite often, drives from which the data are to be recovered have bad sectors, or those sectors that are very
hard, even impossible, to read, mostly due to hardware problems. R-Studio tries to read such sectors several
times. The number of tries is specified either on the Settings/?Bad Sectors dialog box, or on the Properties tab,
the Drive Control section, for each drive separately.
When R-Studio encounters such bad sectors while performing various tasks and they appear unreadable, it
treats them as follows:
Object images:
R-Studio fills the space in the image file where the bad sectors should be with the pattern specified in the Pattern
to fill bad blocks field on the Settings/?
Bad Sectors dialog box. Please note that R-Studio writes the pattern on
the image, not on the source drive.
Files
If Skip files with bad sectors on the Recovery dialog box is cleared, R-Studio fills bad sectors in the recovered
file with the pattern specified on the the Settings/?Bad Sectors dialog box. Information about such files will
appear in the Log.
If Skip files with bad sectors on the Recovery dialog box is selected, R-Studio skips files with bad sectors and
displays their list on the Files with bad sectors dialog box when the recovery has been completed. You may
select files to immediately recover them or to mark for later recovery. You may also save this list to a text file.
Files with bad sectors dialog box

Files with bad sectors Buttons

Select All Click this button to select all files in the list.
Clear All Click this button to unselect all selected files.
Mark Click this button to mark all selected files in the list.
Save to File Click this button to save the list of files with bad sectors to a text file.
Recover Click this button to immediately recover selected files. The bad sectors in the
recovered files will be filled with the pattern specified in the Pattern to fill bad blocks
field on the Settings/?Bad Sectors dialog box.
Objects edited in the Text/?
hexadecimal Editor/?
viewer
Bad sectors in the objects viewed/?edited in the Text/?hexadecimal Editor are shown as filled with the pattern
specified in the Pattern to fill bad blocks field on the Settings/?Bad Sectors dialog box.
4.7 File Information (R-Studio Technician)
R-Studio Technician shows much more information about files than R-Studio does.
Info about a file with good chances Info for a file with below average
for recovery recovery chances
More information
Click this button to pin the file information. This panel will show the information
about the "pinned" file regardless of the current selected file.
Click this button to copy all this information
Click this button to select the file you want to go to.
Click this button to close all the information.

183 R-Studio Manual
Overlapping files Shows the list or files that may occupy the same disk sectors. You may click the file
id to see information about this file.
Regions Shows the list of sectors occupied by the file and corresponding overlapping files.
You may click a sector number open the sector in the built-in Hexadecimal editor.
Examples of file information on other file systems

File info on an ext4fs file system Info for a file on an HFS+ file system
4.8 Memory Usage

You may see how much memory R-Studio uses while performing a data recovery task. This is especially useful
when scanning large disks on a computer with limited resources. You may specify memory control options on the
Memory usage tab in the R-Studio Settings.
To view memory usage,
1 Select Memory usage on the Tools menu
> R-Studio will show the total memory in your computer and how much memory it uses
Memory usage dialog box
Memory usage
Process Memory Shows how much memory R-Studio uses. Limit shows how much memory your
system can virtually allocate to R-Studio. Actual memory allocation depends also on
the RAM and swap file sizes.

System Memory Shows how much RAM is in your system

Physical
System Memory Shows how much virtual memory is in your system
Swap
4.9 Forensic Mode

Note: This feature is available for the Technician version of R-Studio only!
When this mode is enabled, R-Studio will generate a forensic data collection audit log that can be presented at
court hearings. This log includes information about a hardware configuration on which the forensic data collection
takes place and MD5 for recovered files.
Note: A new log will be generated each time the hardware configuration is changed (a hard drive is connected/?
disconnected, an external USB device is connected/?disconnected, etc)
To enable this feature,
* Select Enable Forensic Mode on the Main tab of the Settings dialog box.
Each time you start file recovery, the Forensic Log Settings dialog box will appear.
Forensic Log Settings dialog box
Enter the required information and click the OK button to go to the Recovery dialog box.
While file recovery, R-Studio will create forensic data collection audit log in the specified folder. Below is an
example of such log.
******************************** Forensic Data Collection Audit Log
********************************
R-Studio Network Technician 6.2.153589/2/3/2013
Case Name: Steven v. Christofer

Case Number: 28-S-0205-CR-85763
Operator/Investigator Name: J.F. Lewson

185 R-Studio Manual
**************************************** Drives Information

****************************************
- Drive Number 0 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Computer,Local Computer
* Name [30 bytes]: Local Computer
* OS [74 bytes]: Windows 7 Build 7601, Service Pack 1
* System [150 bytes]: 4 x Intel(R) Core(TM) i3 CPU 530 @ 2.93GHz, 2933
MHz, 3919 MB RAM
- Drive Number 3 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: CDROM
* Name [54 bytes]: PIONEERDVD-RW DVR-219L1.00
+ Device Identification [8 bytes]:
* Vendor [32 bytes]: PIONEER
* Product [64 bytes]: DVD-RW DVR-219L
* Firmware [16 bytes]: 1.00
+ SCSI Address [8 bytes]:
* Port Number [1 bytes]: 3
* Path Id [1 bytes]: 1
* Target Id [1 bytes]: 0
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 4 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Physical Drive,Disk
* Name [52 bytes]: WDC WD75AA-00BAA010.09K11
* OS Object [38 bytes]: \\.\PhysicalDrive0
* R-Studio Driver [44 bytes]: WinNT\Handle\Physical
* Size [8 bytes]: 7.02GB (14726880 sec)
* Sector Size [4 bytes]: 512B
* Partition Size [8 bytes]: 7.02GB (14726880 sec)
# I/O Tries [4 bytes]: Default
+ Drive Control [8 bytes]:
# Maximum Transfer [4 bytes]: 131072
# I/O Unit [4 bytes]: 512
# Buffer Alignment [4 bytes]: 2
+ Physical Drive Geometry [8 bytes]:
* Cylinders [8 bytes]: 916
* Tracks Per Cylinder [4 bytes]: 255
* Sectors Per Track [4 bytes]: 63
# Partition Layout Sector Size [4 bytes]: 512B
* Product [64 bytes]: WDC WD75AA-00BAA0
* Firmware [16 bytes]: 10.09K11
* Serial Number [32 bytes]: WD-WMA2L2883101
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
* Bus Type [4 bytes]: IDE/ATA
+ IDE Properties [8 bytes]:

* Buffer [116 bytes]: 2 MB, Dual ported multi-sector buffer with a read caching
* ECC Bytes [2 bytes]: 40
* PIO Modes [16 bytes]: 1,2,3,4
* DMA Modes [12 bytes]: 0,1,2
* UltraDMA Modes [20 bytes]: 0,1,2,3,4
* Current Mode [22 bytes]: UltraDMA 4
* Int13 Drive Number [4 bytes]: 0x81
- Drive Number 5 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Physical Drive,Disk
* Name [32 bytes]: ST3320418ASCC44
* OS Object [38 bytes]: \\.\PhysicalDrive1
* R-Studio Driver [44 bytes]: WinNT\Handle\Physical
* Size [8 bytes]: 298GB (625142448 sec)
* Partition Size [8 bytes]: 298GB (625142448 sec)
# Partition Layout Sector Size [4 bytes]: 512B
* Product [64 bytes]: ST3320418AS
* Firmware [16 bytes]: CC44
* Serial Number [32 bytes]: 9VMMRZKW
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
* Bus Type [4 bytes]: SerialATA-II
+ IDE Properties [8 bytes]:
* Buffer [12 bytes]: 16 MB
* ECC Bytes [2 bytes]: 4
* PIO Modes [16 bytes]: 1,2,3,4
* DMA Modes [12 bytes]: 0,1,2
* UltraDMA Modes [28 bytes]: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6
* Current Mode [22 bytes]: UltraDMA 5
* Int13 Drive Number [4 bytes]: 0x80
- Drive Number 6 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Volume
* Name [90 bytes]: Volume{445abf3b-13ef-11e0-b147-806e6f6e6963}
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{445abf3b-13ef-11e0-b147-806e6f6e6963}
* R-Studio Driver [42 bytes]: WinNT\Handle\Logical
* Size [8 bytes]: 100MB (204800 sec)

187 R-Studio Manual
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 1.00MB (2048 sec)

* Partition Size [8 bytes]: 100MB (204800 sec)
* Partition Number [4 bytes]: 1
* Partition Type [256 bytes]: NTFS/HPFS
+ NTFS Information [8 bytes]:
* Cluster Size [4 bytes]: 4.00KB (8 sec)
* MFT Record Size [4 bytes]: 1.00KB
* MFT Position [8 bytes]: 33.3MB (68264 sec)
* MFT Mirror Position [8 bytes]: 8.00KB (16 sec)
* Index Block Size [4 bytes]: 4.00KB
* Volume Size [8 bytes]: 99.9MB (204799 sec)
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 7 ---------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Volume,Disk
* Name [6 bytes]: F:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: F:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{ccb23f8c-1302-11e2-8330-20cf30be3944}
* Size [8 bytes]: 2.92GB (6136766 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 32.0KB (64 sec)
* MFT Position [8 bytes]: 12.0KB (24 sec)
* MFT Mirror Position [8 bytes]: 302KB (604 sec)
* Volume Size [8 bytes]: 2.92GB (6136700 sec)


* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 8 ---------------------------------

* Name [6 bytes]: G:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: G:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{e0651538-ace3-11e1-8eff-20cf30be3944}
* Size [8 bytes]: 2.02GB (4257161 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 2.92GB (6136893 sec)
* Partition Type [256 bytes]: FAT32
+ FAT Information [8 bytes]:
* FAT Bits (12,16,32) [4 bytes]: 32
* First Cluster Offset [8 bytes]: 4.06MB (8322 sec)
* Root Directory Cluster [4 bytes]: 2
* First FAT Offset [8 bytes]: 19.0KB (38 sec)
* Size of One FAT Table [8 bytes]: 2.02MB (4150 sec)
* Number of FAT Copies [4 bytes]: 2
# Active FAT copy [4 bytes]: Auto
* Major Version [1 bytes]: 0
* Minor Version [1 bytes]: 0
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0

189 R-Studio Manual
- Drive Number 9 ---------------------------------

* Name [6 bytes]: H:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: H:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{e0651537-ace3-11e1-8eff-20cf30be3944}
* Size [8 bytes]: 2.00GB (4208966 sec)
* Partition Type [256 bytes]: FAT16 (big)
* FAT Bits (12,16,32) [4 bytes]: 16
* First Cluster Offset [8 bytes]: 209KB (418 sec)
* Root Directory Offset [8 bytes]: 263168
* Root Directory Length [4 bytes]: 16.0KB
* Size of One FAT Table [8 bytes]: 128KB (256 sec)
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 10 --------------------------------

* Name [6 bytes]: C:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: C:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{445abf3c-13ef-11e0-b147-806e6f6e6963}
* Size [8 bytes]: 121GB (255793152 sec)

* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 101MB (206848 sec)

* MFT Position [8 bytes]: 3.00GB (6291456 sec)
* Volume Size [8 bytes]: 121GB (255793151 sec)
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 11 --------------------------------

* Name [6 bytes]: D:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: D:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{605e4bfe-13f3-11e0-be0a-20cf30be3944}
* Size [8 bytes]: 176GB (369137664 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 122GB (256000000 sec)

191 R-Studio Manual

* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
- Drive Number 12 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Volume,CDROM
* Name [6 bytes]: E:
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: E:\
* OS Object [98 bytes]: \\?\Volume{445abf3f-13ef-11e0-b147-806e6f6e6963}
* Lun [1 bytes]: 0
* Bus Type [4 bytes]: IDE/ATAPI
- Drive Number 13 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Partition,Logical
* Name [22 bytes]: Partition1
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: F:\
* Size [8 bytes]: 2.92GB (6136766 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 32.0KB (64 sec)
* MFT Position [8 bytes]: 12.0KB (24 sec)
* MFT Mirror Position [8 bytes]: 302KB (604 sec)
- Drive Number 14 --------------------------------

* Mount Points [8 bytes]: G:\

* Size [8 bytes]: 2.02GB (4257161 sec)

* Partition Type [256 bytes]: FAT32
* FAT Bits (12,16,32) [4 bytes]: 32
* First Cluster Offset [8 bytes]: 4.06MB (8322 sec)
* Root Directory Cluster [4 bytes]: 2
* Size of One FAT Table [8 bytes]: 2.02MB (4150 sec)
- Drive Number 15 --------------------------------

* Mount Points [8 bytes]: H:\
* Size [8 bytes]: 2.00GB (4208966 sec)
* Partition Type [256 bytes]: FAT16 (big)
* FAT Bits (12,16,32) [4 bytes]: 16
* First Cluster Offset [8 bytes]: 209KB (418 sec)
* Root Directory Offset [8 bytes]: 263168
* Root Directory Length [4 bytes]: 16.0KB
* Size of One FAT Table [8 bytes]: 128KB (256 sec)
- Drive Number 16 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Empty Space
* Name [28 bytes]: Empty Space16
* Size [8 bytes]: 60.4MB (123796 sec)
* Partition Size [8 bytes]: 60.4MB (123796 sec)
- Drive Number 17 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Partition,Active

193 R-Studio Manual
* Size [8 bytes]: 100MB (204800 sec)

* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 1.00MB (2048 sec)
* Partition Size [8 bytes]: 100MB (204800 sec)
* MFT Position [8 bytes]: 33.3MB (68264 sec)
* Volume Size [8 bytes]: 99.9MB (204799 sec)
- Drive Number 18 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Partition,Primary
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: C:\
* Size [8 bytes]: 121GB (255793152 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 101MB (206848 sec)
- Drive Number 19 --------------------------------

* Drive Type [256 bytes]: Partition,Primary
* Mount Points [8 bytes]: D:\
* Size [8 bytes]: 176GB (369137664 sec)
* Partition Offset [8 bytes]: 122GB (256000000 sec)
***********************************************************************************
*****************

-------------------------------------------- Session 1
---------------------------------------------
START Date / Time of Collection: 2013-02-06 22:09:29
Source drive:Sector Modification Date MD5

File Name
8 2012-12-04 19:53:00
Music
File Data
3966106-3966113
8 2012-12-04 19:53:50
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana
File Data
3966114-3966121
8 2008-05-10 12:31:54 e3ed08b18d2dfe4fffa90fc7e5b7f1ac
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\a_young_girl.mp3
File Data
3966122-3974289
8 2008-05-10 12:28:44 96a828f7d852871c2a8707a918b2a26a
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\boiling_rage.mp3
File Data
3974290-3983473
8 2008-05-10 12:32:50 aeabe7bdc208dd47a1bc6fb6810c7455
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\come_my_beauty.mp3
File Data
3983474-3990817
8 2008-05-10 12:27:38 f6d9d74f36ccf747c947da697a88e8a8
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\if_the_whole_world_was_mine.mp3
File Data
3990818-3993353
8 2008-05-10 12:30:38 855047c9885454adff15d8343f9f4792
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\in_the_tavern.mp3
File Data
3993354-4000649
8 2008-05-10 12:30:58 1b8588242e838d32b6477657ad2d410a
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\love_flies_everywhere.mp3
File Data
4000650-4006017, 4006018-4006697
8 2008-05-10 12:22:30 2f5d751b174e6e6c575dfb5980351011
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\sunrise.mp3
File Data
4006698-4013025
8 2008-05-10 12:26:32 64eb19ac44e2bfcd0481c9c8b11d80a1
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\sweetest_boy.mp3
File Data
4013026-4014601
8 2008-05-10 12:26:02 7cf363567fc0a7d3945dd7fe43c2022b
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_dance.mp3
File Data
4014602-4021481
8 2008-05-10 12:19:52 47b8aadf4db862f4f6ab7ab0ea98eb53
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_face_of_spring.mp3
File Data

195 R-Studio Manual
4021482-4033465
8 2008-05-10 12:36:36 222faa73045887b591fd69c0131b1c8a
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_lovers.mp3
File Data
4033466-4037073
8 2008-05-10 12:29:40 8c0935c960b42c4c4b3b034efb1a301a
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_roasted_swan.mp3
File Data
4037074-4043233
8 2008-05-10 12:38:38 c9fcfaf50a336c6619f42afefa2d9525
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_wheel_of_fortune.mp3
File Data
4043234-4052081
8 2008-05-10 12:14:46 8292a5f076dd419499234f554eeb890f
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\the_wounds_of_fate.mp3
File Data
4052082-4062641
8 2008-05-10 12:23:20 7743d3e148f833f524bf99c0e58a60fc
Music\Carl Orff CarminaBurana\welcome.mp3
File Data
4062642-4070417
8 2012-12-04 19:55:40
Music\Elton_John
File Data
4070418-4070425
8 2008-04-27 18:09:38 700c87da7656c365d7a066caecccc48b
Music\Elton_John\02-A Word in Spanish.mp3
File Data
4070426-4071553, 4071554-4083369
8 2001-10-04 16:41:16 8ff86aa42faaa1169fd14635126945e4
Music\Elton_John\04-Club At The End Of The Street.mp3
File Data
4083370-4096873
8 2008-04-27 18:10:40 ee22ed32d77106baf6ba0adaf9384d7c
Music\Elton_John\05-Sorry Seems to Be the Hardest Word.mp3
File Data
4096874-4107633
8 2001-10-04 16:41:24 dd11b71234d0f11926878da8f156bdab
Music\Elton_John\07-Sacrifice.mp3
File Data
4107634-4121921
8 2001-10-04 16:41:24 43efe3779b6bd5d9a3d7692ada485302
Music\Elton_John\08-I Newer Knew Her Name.mp3
File Data
4121922-4131777
8 2008-04-27 18:11:32 a201b3be4ecb6dd3b4ca6558954824c4
Music\Elton_John\09-Candy By The Pound.mp3
File Data
4131778-4137089, 4137090-4142793
8 2001-10-04 16:41:30 c27400f5d678252ea2a2b9a9dd2603d4
Music\Elton_John\10-Blue avenue.mp3
File Data
4142794-4155081

8 2008-04-27 18:12:02 d5892763c3becea6afec39210e71a917

Music\Elton_John\12-I'm Your Puppet.mp3
File Data
4155082-4165097
8 2008-04-27 18:09:22 326c5af71d036f97c1adfd210b574995
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArtSmall.jpg
File Data
4165098-4165105
8 2008-04-27 18:05:46 317359a14280c519ce8d1f3e4fe607a2
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{00FEB343-A4EF-48C0-A58B-0321C72AFB82}_Large.jpg
File Data
4165106-4165113, 4165114-4165137
8 2008-04-27 18:04:58 0aecba6783c8d3dc9331acadd3394203
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{00FEB343-A4EF-48C0-A58B-0321C72AFB82}_Small.jpg
File Data
4165138-4165145
8 2008-04-27 18:10:04 d75dd97722a8cb3b5d645d280e81b93b
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{6609CAD8-CCF6-4FE7-BB50-D79D8DA92302}_Large.jpg
File Data
4165146-4165153, 4165154-4165161
8 2008-04-27 18:08:22 5235095d98e89f6d03847668788cc00a
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{6609CAD8-CCF6-4FE7-BB50-D79D8DA92302}_Small.jpg
File Data
4165162-4165169
8 2008-04-27 18:10:32 0854eac43624b3ff0a3735ca1463d841
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{758956AA-1FD8-41D1-BEC1-BAF69BCF80DC}_Large.jpg
File Data
4165170-4165177, 4165178-4165185
8 2008-04-27 18:09:22 326c5af71d036f97c1adfd210b574995
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{758956AA-1FD8-41D1-BEC1-BAF69BCF80DC}_Small.jpg
File Data
4165186-4165193
8 2008-04-27 18:08:08 1c1f55cfa551c80ae01494470d5a0ad6
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{AD88489E-F38C-4942-B531-7BE274FACDB2}_Large.jpg
File Data
4165194-4165201, 4165202-4165217
8 2008-04-27 18:07:06 d0ecfea1f078c4457e90412a15ff558c
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{AD88489E-F38C-4942-B531-7BE274FACDB2}_Small.jpg
File Data
4165218-4165225
8 2008-04-27 18:11:12 1252d6a3aef8f3efa58fce8391182166
Music\Elton_John\?esktop.ini
File Data
4165226-4165233
8 2007-06-07 05:07:38 ecb10bc7c33aefb1f30949cc737070e9
Music\Elton_John\Elton_John-02.MP3
File Data
4165234-4176001
8 2007-06-07 05:08:06 d2dbfb298bb2638c3b57d7c679dfe94a
File Data
4176002-4191169

197 R-Studio Manual
8 2007-06-07 05:08:24 09753362b96e24585b4a5915ae3250de

File Data
4191170-4200257
8 2007-06-07 05:09:46 ab933d4eba7f0f36888d7ef44c73f415
File Data
4200258-4202625, 4202626-4217089
8 2007-06-07 05:12:12 9312b2e9a7496b02ba1d6547ca109367
File Data
4217090-4228729
8 2007-06-07 05:12:44 724c5db8a39b7ea61e0ca196c06c96e5
File Data
4228730-4236537
8 2008-04-27 18:10:32 0854eac43624b3ff0a3735ca1463d841
Music\Elton_John\Folder.jpg
File Data
4236538-4236545, 4236546-4236553
8 2012-12-04 19:55:38 6ca1829fb46c96917e6e61a54d75d0f4
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArtSmall.jpg
File Data
1066442-1066449
8 2012-12-04 19:55:38 6ca1829fb46c96917e6e61a54d75d0f4
Music\Elton_John\AlbumArt_{00FEB343-A4EF-48C0-A58B-0321C72AFB82}_Small.jpg
File Data
1066450-1066457
8 2012-12-04 19:55:40 61ee818e8e3041c22d1d64f4aea053f3
Music\Elton_John\?esktop.ini
File Data
1066522-1066529
8 2012-12-04 19:53:58
Music\Manu_Chao
File Data
4236554-4236561
8 2002-05-21 16:04:52 cb7c1b923d38e16087ba8a90a5b2c9fa
Music\Manu_Chao\01-Clandestino.mp3
File Data
4236562-4243529
8 2002-05-21 16:05:36 9b7e1c8711230d72b487a8f26967657d
Music\Manu_Chao\02-Desaparecido.mp3
File Data
4243530-4254193
8 2002-06-24 22:35:42 c67a50c2b40ca8d68cf51a825c65dd1f
Music\Manu_Chao\03-Bongo Bong.mp3
File Data
4254194-4257153, 344370-348833
8 2002-06-24 22:36:50 e1be88d37a71ba4d8f95a1b8ebeb135d
Music\Manu_Chao\04-Je Ne T'Aime Plus.mp3
File Data
348834-354593

8 2002-06-24 22:37:22 ba2e9970e88c4060c4a286f596cb4975

Music\Manu_Chao\05-Mentira....mp3
File Data
354594-367585
8 2002-05-21 16:05:36 ebdb3355e7cc9a35237d1fe6d9ee7d6e
Music\Manu_Chao\06-Lagrimas De Oro.mp3
File Data
367586-375921
8 2002-05-21 16:05:36 b934faff976af01937157d4c7bdd4ce1
Music\Manu_Chao\10-Welcome To Tijuana.mp3
File Data
375922-387377
8 2002-05-21 16:05:36 0367c0565f6ef3da3d97d668c0b25695
Music\Manu_Chao\15-La Despedida.mp3
File Data
387378-396281
8 2008-04-27 19:03:06 df78baa97be4093cae95909a6f94d5fe
Music\Manu_Chao\AlbumArtSmall.jpg
File Data
396282-396289
8 2008-04-27 19:03:20 38e457ed886866f93335968a8638ad08
Music\Manu_Chao\AlbumArt_{A0F31A58-545E-4020-9120-DB47553C0B48}_Large.jpg
File Data
396290-396313
8 2008-04-27 19:03:06 df78baa97be4093cae95909a6f94d5fe
Music\Manu_Chao\AlbumArt_{A0F31A58-545E-4020-9120-DB47553C0B48}_Small.jpg
File Data
396314-396321
8 2008-04-27 19:03:40 afcc0d798665335141014707f4f4ae33
Music\Manu_Chao\?esktop.ini
File Data
396322-396329
8 2008-04-27 19:03:20 38e457ed886866f93335968a8638ad08
Music\Manu_Chao\Folder.jpg
File Data
396330-396353
8 2012-12-04 19:44:14
Video
File Data
1056914-1056921
8 2011-01-22 13:19:16 7b1c1214777f91c71dfbfec0b79e2e3d
Video\Cirque.Du.Soleil.Kooza.2008.avi
File Data
1109602-1122433, 1122434-1187969, 1187970-1253505, 1253506-1319041,
1319042-1384577, 1384578-1450113, 1450114-1515649, 1515650-1581185, 1581186-
1646721, 1646722-1712257, 1712258-1777793, 1777794-1843329, 1843330-1908865,
1908866-1974401, 1974402-2039937, 2039938-2105473, 2105474-2171009, 2171010-
2236545, 2236546-2302081, 2302082-2367617, 2367618-2433153, 2433154-2498689,
2498690-2564225, 2564226-2629761, 2629762-2695297, 2695298-2760833, 2760834-
2826369, 2826370-2891905, 2891906-2957441, 2957442-3022977, 3022978-3088513,
3088514-3154049, 3154050-3219585, 3219586-3285121, 3285122-3350657, 3350658-
3416193, 3416194-3481729, 3481730-3547265, 3547266-3612801, 3612802-3678337,
3678338-3743873, 3743874-3809409, 3809410-3874945, 3874946-3940481, 3940482-3966097

199 R-Studio Manual
END Date / Time of Collection: 2013-02-06 22:11:30

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------
4.10 R-Studio Switches
If there are problems in starting R-Studio and while working with it, you may use switches to avoid them.
The following switches are available:
-all_drives Forces R-Studio to show all logical disks in the system. Normally R-Studio shows
only local disks in the system. Some storage devices may pretend that they are not
local disks.
-debug Includes additional debug information. When this switch is used, an additional
command Create FS Snapshot on the shortcut menu appears for an object with a file
system. An FS Snapshot contains system data for the file system only (file
descriptions without file contents). If a problem appears, this snapshot can be sent to
R-Studio technical support to identify the problem. This switch greatly slows
R-Studio. You may also turn this mode on by selecting Debug Mode on the Settings
dialog box.
-flush Flushes the log file after each write to log operations. This switch is helpful when
R-Studio locks and its log file remains in memory cache unwritten to a disk. This
switch greatly slows R-Studio.
-log <filename> Started with this switch, R-Studio writes its log into the specified file. If R-Studio
locks and its log file remains in memory cache unwritten to a disk, use the -flush
switch.
-mem <size in MB> Sets memory usage limit in MB for R-Studio to reconstruct the file tree. When it
exceeds the limit, a Too many files... message appears. You may temporally stop file
listing and browse through found files. Then you can resume file listing. You also may
skip this file section and continue file listing. Example: -mem 400 - sets the limit to
400 MB.
-no_ide_ext Turns off the inquiry about extended information on HDDs in Wind9x/ME. This
switch may be helpful if R-Studio returns information about HDDs incorrectly
(detects HDD geometry incorrectly).
-no_int13 Turns off the disc access through Int13 in Wind9x/ME. This switch may be helpful if
the system operates incorrectly (detects HDD geometry incorrectly or lock the
system).
-no_ios Turns off the Wind9x/ME protected-mode I/O system. This switch may be helpful if
this system operates incorrectly (detects HDD geometry incorrectly or lock the
system).
-reset R-Studio resets an HDD controller each time it reads a bad sector. This switch may
be helpful if the controller locks after it attempts to read a bad sector, or returns
incorrect data.
-safe Disables automatic partition search on a hard drive, file system recognition on
partitions, and other potentially problematic operations. In this mode, it is necessary
to use Find partition command from the hard drive shortcut menu to manually find a
partition.
If an unrecognized problem appears, start R-Studio with the -debug and -log <filename> switches, and
send the log and screenshot of the R-Studio main panel to the R-Studio technical support:
R-Studio Technical Support Team is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and has an average
response time less than 4 hours.
4.11 Properties Tab
Object size units
You may select the units in which the information on object sizes will be displayed. Some parameters can be
edited when the Debug mode is turned on on the Main dialog box of the R-Studio settings.
To select the units
1 Select Properties on the View menu
2 Select the units in which you want to see object sizes.
You may select
Show as Bytes
Show as Sectors
Show as Bytes and Sectors
1.Basic information
This section shows basic information for a disk object.
More information...
Drive Type Device/disk type and subtype. Current R-Studio version supports the following types:
Disk, WORM, CDROM, Optical, Changer, Floppy, RAM Disk, LDM Partition, LDM
Component, LDM Volume
and subtypes:
Device, OS File, Physical Drive, Mount Point, Partition, Volume Set, Mirror, Stripe Set,
RAID 4, RAID 5, RAID 6
Name Device/disk name
Size Device/disk size
Bus Type Device/disk bus type. Can be:
IDE/ATA, IDE/ATAPI, SCSI, Floppy, USB, 1394, SSA, FibreChannel, RAID, SMART, ABIOS
2.Information on hard drives and logical disks
This section shows available information on hard drives and logical disks. These properties depend on the
drive/disk type and appear only when applicable. Under Windows, an IDE drive/disk may be represented as a
SCSI device, that is why the SCSI Address section appears under these OSes for those drives/disks.
More information...
OS object Appears for image files under Windows for drives/disks. An object name used by OS
to access the device/disk.
R-Studio driver Driver names (both internal and OS) used to access this drive/disk.
Sector Size Drive/disk sector size
Physical Drive This section shows physical geometry for a hard drive. For a logical disk it shows the
Geometry physical geometry for a hard drive where the logical disk resides
Cylinders
Tracks Per Cylinder

201 R-Studio Manual
Sectors Per Track

Sector Size
Device This section shows vendor information for the drive/disk
Identification
Vendor
Product
Firmware
Bus
SCSI Address This section shows SCSI information for the drive/disk
Port Number
Path ID
Target ID
Lun
Windows 9x/ME adds the following properties:
Int13 Drive Number 128 for the first hard drive accessible through Int13, 129 for the second one, etc.
0...128 for drives and other devices accessible through a Windows 9x/ME protected
mode driver, if their Int13 device option is disabled. R-Studio can use Int13 disk
access, and for some drive types, like SCSI devices, Int13 access is preferable. You
may consider enabling the Int13 device option in the Windows Device Manager for
such devices.
Int13 Extension Int13 Extension Version Support for hard drives. Extended Int13 support is necessary
Version for large drives. If this property is zero, Extended Int13 is not supported, otherwise, it
shows Extended Int13 standard version, the large, the better.
3.Properties controlling access to hard drives and logical disks
This section shows properties that control access (read and write) to hard drives and logical disks. They are set
to their optimal values and should be altered only if access problems appear.
More information...
Drive Control
Maximum transfer Maximum data size that can be read or written during a single access to the drive. If
there are problems with drive access, decrease the value of this property
I/O Unit Data size read or written during a single access to the drive is a multiple value of this
property. If there are problems with drive access, decrease the value of this property
Buffer Alignment Drive data transfer buffer is positioned at an address multiple value of this property. If
there are problems with drive access, increase the value of this property.
These three properties are set by OS drivers. If the drivers set incorrect values, problems may appear during
data transfer operations. You can alter them until data transfer becomes stable.
I/O Tries Number of read/write tries during access to the drive. If there are bad sectors on the
drive, increase the value of this property. This may help to successfully read those
sectors. Sometimes, if the I/O Tries parameter is set too large and there are some
unreadable sectors on the hard drive, the hard drive-controller pair may refuse to

perform any successive read/write operations with the entire hard drive when it fails to
read/write such sectors. In this case, set this parameter to zero.
The default value is specified on the Settings (Bad Sectors) panel.
· If Default read attempts is set to 0, the entire part with bad sectors will be filled with
the specified pattern.
· If Default read attempts is set to a non-zero value, R-Studio reads again that part
sector by sector, repeating the attempts the specified number of times. If R-Studio
still cannot read a bad sector, it fills the sectors with the specified pattern. In this case
only the bad sectors will be filled with the pattern, but that extremely slows the disk
read process.
For example, if you set Default read attempts to 1, a bad sector will be read 2 times.
4.Partition properties
A partition is a continuous area on a hard drive, characterized by its offset and size. There are partitions on
basic disks, dynamic disks, and recognized volumes and partitions. R-Studio treats regions like partitions.
More information...
Partition Offset Initial offset for the partition.
Partition Size Size of the partition.
Partition Type File system type for the partition. If the record in the drive partition table is incorrect,
this property may differ from the actual file system type for this partition. Still,
R-Studio will process this partition correctly, as it does not use this property.
Partition number Appears under Windows NT/?2000/?XP/?2003/?Vista/?2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10 only. Shows the
number of the partition on the physical drive.
For regions and recognized partitions, Partition Offset and Partition Type properties can be manually
corrected.
5.Compound volume properties
A compound volume is a union of several partitions or other disk objects. Each union type has its own rules,
unique for each compound volume type. Among compound volumes are: Volume Sets (RAIDs Level 0),
Mirrors (RAIDs Level 1), RAIDs4/5/6 (RAIDs Level 4/5/6), both physical and created by the user (Virtual
Volume Sets, Virtual Stripe Sets, Virtual Mirrors, Virtual RAID5).
More information...
Main properties of compound volumes are parents (disk objects from which a compound volume is
created) and their order. These properties may be viewed in the Parents tab. For user-created compound
volumes these properties may be altered.
Raid Block Size Data block size for compound volumes of RAID (Level 0-5) types
6.LDM disks and volumes (Dynamic Disks)
LDM disks and volumes are volumes controlled by Logical Disk Manager (LDM). They are represented on a
hard drive as a LDM database rather than partition tables. Under Windows ?2000/?XP/?2003/?Vista/?2008/?7/?
8/8.1/?10, LDM disks are also called Dynamic Disks.

203 R-Studio Manual
More information...
Offset of Logical Initial offset of a logical disk on a hard drive. For disks, initially formatted by LDM, this
Disk value is often 31.5KB, for converted disks, it may be larger.
Supposed Parents Supposed number of parent partitions for compound LDM volumes. If the LDM
Count database is not damaged, the value of this property must be equal to the number of
parent objects in the Parents tab for the disk object.
LDM Host GUID Global Unique Identifier of a computer system where this LDM disk group has been
created.
LDM DiskGroup GUID Global Unique Identifier of the LDM disk group.
LDM Disk GUID Global Unique Identifier of the hard drive.
LDM Volume GUID Global Unique Identifier of the volume.
LDM Disk ID Local hard drive Identifier, unique within this LDM disk group.
LDM Partition ID Local partition Identifier, unique within this LDM disk group.
LDM Component ID Local component Identifier, unique within this LDM disk group.
LDM Volume ID Local volume Identifier, unique within this LDM disk group.
LDM Disk AltName Additional Alternative Name given by LDM to the hard drive.
LDM Disk DriveHint Last name of the volume, under which is has been mounted in the system. May be
either a letter (C:, D:, etc.), or a mount point under Windows ?2000/?XP/?2003/?Vista/?
2008/?7/?8/8.1/?10.
7.File System Volume properties
A File System (FS) volume is a disk object where a certain, supported by R-Studio, file system is present.
There are two FS volume types: FS volume on a regular disk object and a recognized volume, found by a scan
process. FS volume properties depend on volume's file system and type.
7.1.NTFS Volume properties
These properties are present for all NTFS volumes and represent their main properties. For recognized
volumes, these values can be altered.
More information...
NTFS Information Regular volumes
Recognized NTFS Recognized volumes
Cluster Size Cluster size for the NTFS volume.
MFT record size Size of one MFT record describing one file on the NTFS volume. This is an important
property of any NTFS volume. Its common value is 1KB. If this property has incorrect
value, many files may be incorrectly recovered.
Sector Size Sector size for the physical drive. This property is read from the boot sector of the
NTFS volume and does not affect R-Studio operation.
Index Block Size Index block size for the NTFS volume. This property determines binary trees used to
store NTFS folder structure. It does not affect R-Studio operation.
MFT position MFT offset from the start of the NTFS volume.
MFT Mirror Position Second MFT copy offset from the start of the NTFS volume.
Volume size Size of the NTFS volume. This property does not affect R-Studio operation.

7.2.FAT Volume properties

These properties are present for all FAT volumes and represent their main properties. For recognized
More information...
FAT Information Regular volumes
Recognized FAT Recognized volumes
FAT Bits (12,16,32) FAT type. 12 for the FAT12, 16 for the FAT16, 32 for the FAT32.
Cluster Size Cluster size for the FAT volume.
First Cluster Offset Offset of the first cluster from the start of the FAT volume.
Boot Directory (For FAT32 only.) Cluster number where the root directory starts on the FAT volume
Cluster where the logical disk resides.
Root Directory (For FAT12 and 16 only.) Root directory offset from the start of the FAT volume.
Offset
Root Directory (For FAT12 and 16 only.) Root directory length for the FAT volume.
Length
First FAT Offset Offset for the first FAT table on the volume. Together with the Size of One Fat Table
property, is a most important property for a FAT volume. If this property is incorrect,
many files (especially fragmented ones) may be incorrectly recovered.
Size of One FAT Size of one FAT table on the volume.
Table
Sector Size Sector size of the hard drive. This property is read from the boot sector of the FAT
volume and does not affect R-Studio operation.
Number of FAT Number of FAT copies on the FAT volume.
Copies
Active FAT copy Active FAT table number for the FAT volume. Can be set to Disabled, Auto, 1, or 2. If
it is Disabled, R-Studio processes the volume as there is no FAT table present. This
may be useful if the volume has been reformatted and thus a new FAT table is created
and the old one is deleted. In this case, it is reasonable to recover files from the
previous volume without processing the new and irrelevant FAT table. All files will be
recovered as continuous byte chains beginning from their start cluster. Unfragmented
files will be recovered successfully. If it is 1 or 2, R-Studio uses the first or second
FAT table copy, respectively. If it is Auto, R-Studio uses both FAT table copies and
decides, which FAT table copy should be used for a particular FAT table sector. This
may be useful when both FAT tables are partially damaged.
Major version FAT version.
Minor version FAT minor version.
Volume size Size of the volume.
7.3.Ext2/3/4FS Volume properties
These properties are present for all Ext2/3/4FS volumes and represent their main properties. For recognized
More information...
Ext2FS Information Regular volumes

205 R-Studio Manual
Recognized Ext2FS Recognized volumes

Block Size Block size of Ext2FS file system. A block in the Ext2/3/4FS file system is similar to a
cluster in the FAT file system.
First SuperBlock Offset of the first SuperBlock from the start of the Ext2/3/4FS volume.
Offset
Blocks Per Volume Number of blocks in the Ext2/3/4FS volume.
INodes Per Volume Number of inodes on the Ext2/3/4FS volume. An inode is a record describing file's
size, attributes, position on an Ext2F/3/4S volume - all information about a file, except
its name, which is stored separately. Therefore, the INodes Per Volume parameter is
equal to the maximum number of files on an Ext2/3/4FS volume.
Creator OS The OS that created this Ext2/3/4FS volume. May be Linux, Hurd, Masix, FreeBSD,
Lites.
Major version Ext2/3/4FS version. Usually 1.
Minor version Ext2/3/4FS minor version. Usually 0.
Last Mount Time Last mount time for this Ext2/3/4FS volume.
Last Write Time Last write time for this Ext2/3/4FS volume.
Last Check Time Last check time for this Ext2/3/4FS volume.
Volume size Size of the volume.
7.4.Recognized Volume properties
These properties are present for all recognized volumes, regardless of their file system type. They estimate
how reliable those volumes are recognized. This is useful for fast search for, and selection of, optimally
recognized volume to recover.
More information...
Parsed File Entries Number of files proving that this recognized volume existed. May have any non-
negative values. The main property characterizing the reliability of volume recognition.
The larger it, the higher probability that this recognized volume has file system
properties that have been correctly found.
Parsed Boot Number of boot records proving that this recognized volume existed. May be 0 or 1.
Records This is the second important property characterizing the reliability of volume
recognition.
Estimated Size Estimated size of the recognized FS partition/volume. This property shows the most
probable size of the recognized FS partition/volume. Alternatively, Size and Partition
Size are set to the highest possible values in order to recover the maximum number of
files.

V Working with the Third-Party Hardware

The Technician version of R-Studio can work together with third-party hardware developed for in-depth data
recovery. Currently, the following devices are supported:
· DeepSpar Disk Imager™
5.1 DeepSpar Disk Imager™

DeepSpar Disk Imager™ (DDI) is an HDD imaging device specifically built for data recovery from hard
drives with hardware issues. It greatly increases imaging speed, accuracy, and integrity of data retrieved from
such drives.
The main features that DDI provides when working with hard drives are the following:
· Direct low-level access to a hard drive bypassing the computers BIOS.
· Disabling specific drive read/?write heads.
· Disable SMART subsystem, Bad Sector Reallocation, and Read Look-Ahead
· Read sector timeout controlled by Software/?Hardware/?PHY drive reset commands
· Bit level analysis of corrupted data to filter out the read-write channel noise
· Fully customizable multi-pass imaging
And many more others an advanced disk imager must have. You may learn more about DDI on its vendor site:
DeepSpar Disk Imager™.
DeepSpar Disk Imager™ basics
The main idea of data recovery with DDI is to clone data from the source hard drive with a certain level of
hardware malfunction to a clone drive and perform data recovery operations either from the clone drive or while
data is being cloned. Such approach greatly reduces tear and wear of the source hard drive and reduces further
deterioration of its state.
There are two modes in which DDI processes disks:
· DDI clones the entire source hard drive to the source one consequently, sector by sector. Any further data
recovery will be made from the clone HDD.
· DDI clones those sectors of the source HDD which have been read during data recovery. Such readings
are optimized to minimize the movement of the drive's head unit. All following reads from those sectors will
be done from the clone disk. For example, if files are to be recovered from a partition on the drive, DDI
will clone the boot record of the drive, the file table of the partition, and the sectors of the files. If the
partition is scanned, the scanned sectors will be cloned, too. All consecutive operations, such as file
preview, and so on, will be done from the clone disk. This greatly reduces the time necessary to perform
the recovery operations and furthermore hard disk wear.

207 R-Studio Manual
DeepSpar Disk Imager™ board
Read the DDI documentation on how to install DDI connect the drives to DDI and start working with it.
The DDI board should be installed into a separate network computer (the DDI computer), and the source and
clone drives should be connected to it. The DDI computer should be started using the boot USB stick supplied
with the board. R-Studio running on another computer (the R-Studio computer) accesses the disk via the
network. All data recovery operations will be done through this setup:

Working with the Third-Party Hardware 208
There may be several DDI computers on the network, R-Studio will connect to all of them. Such configuration
may be useful for RAID recovery when several disks on the RAID have hardware problems.
Working with DDI
To start working with DDI, its computer should be connected to R-Studio.
To connect R-Studio to the DDI computer,
* Select Connect to DDI on the Drive menu
> The disks connected to DDI will appear on the Drive pane.
Now it is possible to work with disks connected to DDI like all other disk
objects on the Drive panel. For example,
such disks may be included into virtual RAIDs and other compound objects.

209 R-Studio Manual
Viewing the drive map

A drive map shows the conditions for individual disk sectors. You may see which sectors are OK, bad, or
unstable.
To view the drive map,
* Right-click the required hard drive/?
partition and select Show drive map... on the shortcut menu,
or
select the object and select Show drive map... on the Create menu
> The drive map will appear in the right tab.
DDI Drive Map tab
Drive map controls

+/- Zooms into/out of, the data.
To see more detailed information about a particular sector range, right click the corresponding rectangle and
select Information on the shortcut menu.
Block information dialog box
Click the Open in Hex Editor button to open the selected block in the Text/?
hexadecimal Editor.

Cloning file sectors

You may clone separate files when necessary.
To clone sectors of a single file,
* Right-click the file and select Clone file sectors on the shortcut menu.
or
select the file and select Clone file sectors on the File menu
> The file sectors will be cloned and R-Studio will show their status in the Contents pane.
To clone sectors of several files,
* Mark the files, right-click them, and select Clone marked file sectors on the shortcut menu.
> The file sectors will be cloned and R-Studio will show their status in the Contents pane.
Sector status
OK Read without errors
B Bad
C Corrupted. At least one sector hasn't been read.
Unprocesse At least one sector isn't cloned yet.
d
Viewing the file map
A file map shows the conditions for individual file sectors. You may see which sectors are OK, bad, or unstable.
To view the file map,
* Right-click the required file and select Map of file... on the shortcut menu,
> The file map will appear in the lower pane.

211 R-Studio Manual
DDI File Map pane
File map controls

+/- Zooms into/out of, the data.
To see more detailed information about a particular sector range, right click the corresponding rectangle and
select Information on the shortcut menu.
Block information dialog box
Click the Open in Hex Editor button to open the selected block in the Text/?
hexadecimal Editor.
R-Studio can also load and process images created with the DeepSpar Disk Imager™.
Connecting to DeepSpar Disk Imager™ manually
If R-Studio cannot find DeepSpar Disk Imager™, the Select Interface dialog box will appear. Try to find the
DDI interface manually.

VI R-Studio Emergency
R-Studio Emergency is a tool that allows you to startup a computer with a damaged startup disk and recover
data stored on its hard drives. Then restored data can either be saved on its disk or transferred to a working
computer via a network.
The R-Studio Emergency version is a part of the R-Studio software package.
You may run this R-Studio Emergency version on a computer for which you have bought an R-
Studio license, and you may not transfer the licensed software to another computer.
R-Studio Emergency
Installing R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
Creating Startup Disks
R-Studio Emergency Operation

Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Emergency Startup Disks
File Recovery
Disk Scan
Disk Images
Using R-Studio Emergency as Emergency Agent
Technical Information
Network Drives
Properties and Text/Hexadecimal Viewer
Log
Hardware Compatibility List

6.1 Contact Informaiton and Technical Support
To obtain the latest version of R-Studio Emergency, go to:
R-StudioTechnical Support Team is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and has an average response
time less than 4 hours.
213 R-Studio Manual

Send your support request to: http://www.r-tt.com/Support_request.html
6.2 Creating Startup Disks
· Installing R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
· Creating Startup Disks Using R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
· Creating Startup Disks for Mac and Linux Computers
6.2.1 Installing R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
Attention Windows NT/2000/XP/2003/Vista/2008/7 users! You must have administrative privileges

to install R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator.
If you are not sure whether you have such privileges, you almost certainly do not have them. Contact your system
administrator for assistance.
1.Run the setup file.
2.Follow the on-screen instructions.
You may create startup disks even before the installation ends.
6.2.2 Creating Startup Disks Using R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
You need to create either
· A startup CD/DVD disc. You may create an ISO image, or write the disc directly from R-Studio Emergency
Startup Media Creator, if there is a CD/DVD recorder in your system. You may use this disc to start both
UEFI computers (modern Windows/Mac/Linux systems) and old Windows/Mac/Linux machines.
or
· A startup FAT/FAT32 removable device recognized by your system as a bootable one. The total available size
of the device should be more than 50 MB. You may use this device to start both UEFI computers (modern
Windows/Mac/Linux systems) and old Windows/Mac/Linux machines.
or
· 5 floppy disks. You may use them to start old Windows/Mac/Linux computers
Check the Hardware Compatibility List.
If you have problems with starting you computer up from the R-Studio Emergency startup disks, select
Configure startup media troubleshooting options on the Startup media type selection dialog box. Then the
Startup Media Troubleshooting Options dialog box will appear. You may configure these options to eliminate
those problems.
When R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator starts, its Welcome dialog box appears:

R-Studio Emergency 214
Welcome to R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator dialog box

Welcome dialog box
click the Next button to see the list of all devices on which startup disks may be created.
Startup media type selection dialog box
To create a startup CD/DVD disc directly on your CD/DVD writer (if present):
1 Run R-Studio Emergency
2 Select the CD/DVD writer on the Startup media type selection dialog box and click the Next button
3 Read and accept the License Agreement and enter the registration key on the R-Studio Emergency
Activation dialog box and click the Next button
R-Studio Emergency Activation dialog box

215 R-Studio Manual
4 Insert a blank CD/DVD disk into the CD/DVD recorder and click the Next button
Insert a CD/DVD disc dialog box
> R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the startup CD/DVD disc showing the
progress on the Creating startup media dialog box
Creating startup media dialog box
When R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes creating the startup CD/DVD disc, the R-
Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear
You may either exit R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator by clicking the Finish button or create
another startup media by clicking the Back button.
R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message
To create an ISO image of a startup CD/DVD disc

2 Select ISO Image for a startup CD/DVD on the R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator dialog box
and click the Next button

4 Select a place and file name for the ISO image of the startup CD/DVD and click the Save button
> When R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes writing the file with the ISO image, the
R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear
another startup media by clicking the Next button.
R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished dialog box
5 Create the startup CD/DVD using your favorite CD/DVD creation software
Load the created ISO image into the CD/DVD creation software. Consult documentation for the software
for details.
To create a startup FAT/FAT32 removable device
2 Select the removable device on the Startup media type selection dialog box and click the Next button
4 Check that the FAT/FAT32-formatted device is ready and click the Next button
Ready to create startup media dialog box
> R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the startup USB disk showing the
progress on the Creating startup media dialog box
When R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes creating the startup device, the R-
Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear

217 R-Studio Manual
R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished dialog box
To create floppy disks:

You will need 5 floppy disks.
2 Select Floppy Disk for the startup floppy disks on the R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator
dialog box and click the Next button
4 Insert the first floppy disk and click the Next button on the Ready to create startup media dialog box
R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation- Floppy Disk message
> R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the first startup floppy disk showing
the progress on the Creating startup media dialog box
5 Insert the second floppy disk and click the OK button when the Please insert formatted diskette #2
into drive A: message will appear
> When R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes creating the second startup floppy disk,
the R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear

R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message
Startup Media Troubleshooting Options

Those options will help you if you have problems with starting you computer up from the R-Studiostartup disks.
Please, contact the R-Studio Technical Support Team for more information.
R-Studio Startup Media Troubleshooting Options dialog box
Display kernel startup if this checkbox is enabled, R-Studio Emergency displays all startup messages.
messages That may be useful to locate the source of the problem when your system hangs
during R-Studio Emergency startup.
Disables ACPI Select these checkboxes when your system detects some hardware incorrectly
Disables APIC during R-Studio Emergency startup and displays messages like: hda: lost
interrupt
Disables USB device support Select this checkbox if your system experiences problems with USB devices
Disables SCSI device support Select this checkbox if your system experiences problems with SCSI devices
Disables PCMCIA device Select this checkbox if your system experiences problems with PCMCIA
support devices during R-Studio Emergency startup.
Disables DMA for all IDE disk Select this checkbox if your system experiences problems with IDE disks during
drives R-Studio Emergency startup.
IRQ polling mode Select this checkbox to enable the IRQ polling mode to prevent locking the
system because a device generates too much interrupts for the system to handle.
PCI BIOS Select an appropriate option if your system experiences problems with PCI
cards.
BIOS RAIDS Select an appropriate option if your system experiences problems with RAIDs
built in the system board.

219 R-Studio Manual
6.2.3 Creating Startup Disks on Mac and Linux Computers

To start a Mac or a Linux computer, you may use the following devices:
1. A USB device created using the R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator for Windows. See the Creating
Startup Disks Using R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator page for more details.
2. A USB device created using a Mac or Linux computer. To create such device, download the ZIP archive of
R-Studio Emergency, unzip it, and write files to a FAT32-formatted USB device.
Please note that you cannot use this disk to start non-UEFI computers (old Macs, for example), nor can you just
copy those files to a CD/DVD disc to create an R-Studio Emergency startup disc. If you need a CD/DVD disk,
burn it using the ISO image.
3. A startup CD/DVD disc. Download the ISO image of that disk and burn it or use the R-Studio Emergency
Startup Media Creator for Windows to burn it on a Windows computer.
6.3 R-Studio Emergency Operation

File Recovery
Disk Scan
Disk Images
Technical Information
Network Drives
Log
R-Studio Emergency
6.3.1 Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Emergency Startup Disks
We recommended that you print out this help page and have the hardcopy on hand while you are
performing this action.
If there is a non-IDE disk controller in your system, or you plan to use network disks or external hardware
devices, first check the Hardware Compatibility List.
If you plan to use any external device, turn it on before starting the system.
If the motherboard in your computer supports the Serial ATA (SATA) devices, but IDE disks are also present,
only the SATA devices should be set to the Enhanced Mode in BIOS.

To start the computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup CD/DVD disc or any removable
device,
1 Make sure that the first startup device in the system BIOS is the CD/DVD drive or the removable device
Disable "Secure boot" in the system BIOS if your computer is certified to run Windows 8. Refer to your
system documentation for details.
2 Insert the R-Studio Emergency startup CD/DVD disc and start your computer
If you have a Mac computer
To start a Mac computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk,
1. Insert a CD/DVD disc or connect a USB disk
2. Switch the Mac on.
3. While loading, press the Option key on the Mac keyboard (the Alt key if you use a non-Apple keyboard).
The Options key
4. Select the EFI boot disk and press Enter.

The R-Studio Emergency startup disk
R-Studio Emergency will start loading.

Then a startup screen will appear:

221 R-Studio Manual
Select the R-Studio Emergency GUI (Graphic Mode) to run R-Studio Emergency in the graphic mode
in which its user interface is similar to the Windows version. If R-Studio Emergency cannot run in this
mode, restart the system in the Safe VGA mode (only VESA-compliant) which is compatible with most
video cards and monitors. If it fails too, select the Text mode in which the R-Studio Emergency user
interface is shown in the pseudo-graphic mode compatible with all video cards. The help describes this
pseudo-graphic mode.
> R-Studio Emergency will start and its Device/Disk panel will appear
To start the computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup floppy disks,
1 Make sure that the first startup device in the system BIOS is A (Floppy)
Refer to your system documentation for details.
2 Insert the first startup floppy disk and start your computer
> The following text will appear on the screen:
Loading
Uncompressing ... OK, starting the kernel
VFS: Insert the second boot disk and press ENTER
3 Insert the second disk and press ENTER.
> R-Studio Emergency will start and its Device/Disk panel will appear
Secure boot:
It may be impossible to start a Windows 8 certified computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk without some
additional actions. This happens because any computer should use a so-called "Secure boot" procedure to comply with
Windows 8 hardware certification from Microsoft. In brief, this procedure prevents computer from booting into any operating
system that isn't digitally signed with an appropriate digital signature. "Secure boot" is claimed to prevent unauthorized
modification of the boot sector by bootkits, viruses, trojans, and other malicious software. To the date, only Windows 8,
Windows Server 2012, and selected Linux distributions support this feature. As a side effect, it also prevents most LiveCDs,
rescue disks (R-Studio and R-Drive Image included), and other OS from running.
Likely enough, the other requirement of Windows 8 hardware certification is to make it possible for the user to disable the
Secure boot procedure. Those settings can be done through the system BIOS under the Boot options. Generally, it's enough
to enable Legacy support in those options, but sometimes it may require additional actions. Please, refer to your system
documentation to learn more about disabling/enabling Secure boot.
When Secure boot is disabled, it should be possible to start the computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk.
Please note that you should enable this feature back after using the startup disks because Windows 8 or Server 2012 may
not start properly without the Secure boot feature enabled.

6.3.2 File Recovery
To recover files,
1 Select a partition on the Device/Disk panel on which the files to recover reside and press the Enter key
> R-Studiowill change its panel showing the disk's folders/files structure
2 Select the file to recover on the Files View panel. Use the Tab key to switch between panes
Files View panel
3 Press the F2 key and specify the output folder on the Recover dialog box
Recover dialog box
External USB drives with the NTFS file system: R-Studio Emergency can save recovered files on
such disks if they are properly disconnected in a Windows system using the Safely Remove Hardware icon
in the system tray or while shutting Windows down.
Mapping Network Drives
Viewing object properties
6.3.3 Searching for a File
To search for a file,

1 Select Find on the Tools menu (or press the Alt+F key)
2 Specify a file name or mask

223 R-Studio Manual
Find dialog box
Look at dialog box

Deleted files: If it is selected, R-Studio makes a search among deleted files/folders.
Existing files: If it is selected, R-Studio makes a search among existing files/folders.
Files: If it is selected, R-Studio includes files into a search.
Folders: If it is selected, R-Studio includes folders into a search.
To find the next file corresponding to the specified file mask,
* Press the Alt+N key
6.3.4 Disk Scan
To scan an object
1 Select an object on the Device/Disk panel and press the F6 key
2 Specify the required parameters on the Scan dialog box and press the Enter key
Scan dialog box
Scan dialog box

Start: Sets the start point of the area to be scanned.
Size: Sets the size of the area to be scanned.
Numbers in these fields can be in bytes or sectors.
If no letters are after the numbers, R-Studioassumes the numbers in bytes.
The following case-ignoring notation is possible:

b Bytes
kb Kilobytes
mb Megabytes
gb Gigabytes
tb Terabytes
> When an object is scanned, it may be searched for files, and found files may be recovered the same
way as for a regular object
Scan results
Found objects:
Extra Found Files Entries of known file types have been found
Recognized1 Records and file entries are found for this partition
Recognized2 Only file entries are found for this partition
Recognized3 Only boot records are found for this partition
To save scan information
1 Select an object with scan information
2 Press the Alt+D key and select Save Scan Information on the Drive menu
3 Specify the output folder and file name on the Save Scan Information dialog box
To open scan information
1 Select an object to which scan information is to be opened
2 Press the Alt+D key and select Open Scan Information on the Drive menu
3 Specify the folder and file name with the scan information on the Open Scan Information dialog box
To delete scan information
1 Select an object to which scan information is to be deleted
2 Press the Alt+D key and select Delete Scan Information on the Drive menu
6.3.5 Disk Images
To create an image file

1 Select an object on the Device/Disk panel

225 R-Studio Manual
2 Press the Alt+D key and select Create Plain Image File or Create Compressed Image File on the Drive
menu
Create Image dialog box
Plain Image If this option is selected, R-Studio will create a simple exact copy of the
object. This image format is compatible with the previous versions of R-
Studio.
Compressed Image If this option is selected, R-Studio will create an image file compatible with
the images created by R-Drive Image, but incompatible with the previous
versions of R-Studio.
3 Specify the output folder and file name on the Create Image File dialog box
To load an image file
1 Press the Alt+D key and select Open Image File on the Drive menu
2 Specify the folder and file name with the image on the Open Image File dialog box
6.4 Using R-Studio Emergency as an Emergency Agent
R-Studio Emergency can be used as an emergency agent for R-Studio. Moreover, if you have a Mac
computer, this is the only way to start it with R-Studio Agent Emergency.
To start the computer with the R-Studio Emergency/Agent startup CD/DVD disc or any removable
device ,
1 Make sure that the first startup device in the system BIOS is the CD/DVD drive or the removable device
system documentation for details.
2 Insert the R-Studio Emergency startup CD/DVD disc or the removable device and start your computer
If you have a Mac computer
To start a Mac computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk,
1. Insert a CD/DVD disc or connect a USB disk
2. Switch the Mac on.
3. While loading, press the Option key on the Mac keyboard (the Alt key if you use a non-Apple keyboard).

The Options key
4. Select the EFI boot disk and press Enter.

The R-Studio Emergency startup disk
R-Studio Emergency will start loading.

Then a startup screen will appear:

227 R-Studio Manual
Startup Options
2 R-Studio Agent Emergency to run R-Studio Emergency as an emergency agent.

Select the
> R-Studio Agent Emergency will start and its prompt will appear
R-Studio Emergency as an Emergency Agent
If your network has a DHCP server

The computer running R-Studio Agent Emergency will be assigned an IP address automatically
A prompt with a computer address will appear. You need to remember it to access the computer via
network.
If your network does not have a DHCP server
You need to configure the interfaces and IP addresses manually.
1. Press Enter to start configuring the settings. A prompt to select an interface will appear. Enter the selected
interface name and press Enter.
2. A prompt to enter its IP address and optional subnet mask will appear. Enter the IP address and optional
subnet mask and press Enter.

Network Setting Configuration
3. A prompt to configure another interface, gateway, or to finish configuring the interfaces will appear. Enter
gw, enter the IP address of the gateway, and press Enter.
Network Setting Configuration
4. Press Enter to finish configuring the interfaces, or enter the name of the next interface to configure.
> R-Studio Agent Emergency will show a prompt that is ready to accept connections
Now the computer may be accessed by R-Studio via network.

.
Secure boot:
It may be impossible to start a Windows 8 certified computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk without some

229 R-Studio Manual
When Secure boot is disabled, it should be possible to start the computer with the R-Studio Emergency startup disk.
To connect to R-Studio's computer,
1 Press the Enter key and enter the IP address of the computer where R-Studio is running as
IPaddress:port.
The default port is 8080, and you don't have to specify it.
2 Enter the password if required, and press the Enter key.
> When the connection is established successfully, R-Studio Agent Emergency will notify you about
this.
6.5 R-Studio Emergency Technical Information

Network Drives
Log
R-Studio Emergency
R-Studio Emergency
R-Studio Emergency Operation


File Recovery
Disk Scan
Disk Images

6.5.1 Properties and Text/Hexadecimal Viewer
To view object properties,

1 Select an object
2 Press the F7 key
To view an object
1 Select an object
2 Press the F3 key
3 Press the F6 key to view and select file attributes
Press the Esc key to close the viewer.
6.5.2 Network Drives
To map a network drive,

1 On a dialog box with Map Network Drive, press the Alt+M key
> The Querying DHCP message will appear
If the network has a DHCP server, the computer will obtain an IP address automatically. A list of adapters
and their IP addresses will appear on the Network Adapters dialog box.
If the network does not have a DHCP server, select a network adapter on the Network Adapters dialog
box and press the F4 key. Enter the IP address and network mask and press the Enter button.
Network Addresses dialog box
2 Select a configured network adapter and press the Enter key

231 R-Studio Manual
3 Enter the required information on the Map Network Drive message message
Map Network dialog box
Server IP Address: IP address of the computer where the network drive is to reside.
Server Share Name: Name of the shared folder where the network drive is to reside.
Login: Username of a user on the computer where the network drive is to reside.
Password: User's password on the computer where the network drive is to reside.
For the network drive's path //SERVER/Net_Drive,
Server IP address: The IP address of the SERVER computer (192.168.1.20)
Server share name : Net_Drive.
> The mounted network disk will appear
To disconnect a mounted network drive
1 Select a mounted network drive
2 Switch to the Disconnect button and press the Enter key
6.5.3 Log
To clear log information

* Select Clear Log on the Tools menu
To save log information to a file
* Select Save Log To File on the Tools menu
6.5.4 Devices to Store Recovered Files
R-Studio Emergency can write recovered files to the following devices:
· FAT devices such as USB sticks, memory cards, and other similar devices. Such devices are inexpensive and
easily available, they can be fully accessed by all operating systems, but they have one important drawback:
they cannot store files larger that 2GB. So, if you plan to recover large video files, this is not your option.
· NTFS disks (primarily used in Windows computers).

Access without any third-party software:
Windows computers: full.
Mac computers: read.

Linux computers: full.
· HFS/HFS+ disks (used in Mac computers).

Access without any third-party software:
Windows computers: no.
Mac computers: full. Some access problems may appear for files written by R-Studio Emergency.
Linux computers: full. Some access problems may appear for files written by R-Studio Emergency.
· Network disks. Such disks may be on other network computers or NAS devices. See the Network Drives
page for more details
How to solve file access problems on Macs

Finder in the OSX system shows such inaccessible folders and files in the following way:
Inaccessible folders in Finder
To get access to such data, do the following:

1. Under an administrator account, right-click the folder and select Get Info on the contextual menu.
Info of an inaccessible folder

233 R-Studio Manual
Click the Lock icon in the Sharing & Permissions section to unlock the folder properties. The system will
ask you for the account password.
2. Click the Privilege column and select Read & Write on the contextual menu.
Setting the access rights for the folder
3. If this is a folder with other folders and files, click the Properties icon and select Apply to enclosed
items.
Setting access rights for enclosed items in the folder

Then click the Lock icon to lock the properties back.

6.6 R-Studio Emergency Hardware Compatibility List
R-Studio Emergency supports the following hardware devices:
Data Storage Devices Networking Devices
Serial ATA and Parallel ATA drivers Ethernet (10 or 100Mbit)
ACPI firmware driver for PATA 3c501 ÈtherLink`
AHCI SATA 3c503 ÈtherLink II`
ALi PATA 3c505 ÈtherLink Plus`
AMD/NVidia PATA 3c507 ÈtherLink 16`
ARTOP 6210/6260 PATA 3c509/3c529 (MCA)/3c579 ÈtherLink III`
ARTOP/Acard ATP867X PATA 3c515 ISA `Fast EtherLink`
ATI PATA 3c590/3c900 series (592/595/597)
CMD / Silicon Image 680 PATA `Vortex/Boomerang`
CMD640 PCI PATA 3cr990 series `Typhoon`
CMD64x PATA AMD 8111 (new PCI lance)
CS5510/5520 PATA AMD LANCE and PCnet (AT1500 and NE2100)
CS5530 PATA AMD PCnet32 PCI
CS5535 PATA AT1700/1720
CS5536 PATA Adaptec Starfire/DuraLAN
Compaq Triflex PATA Ansel Communications EISA 3200
Cypress CY82C693 PATA Apricot Xen-II on board Ethernet
EFAR SLC90E66 Atheros L2 Fast Ethernet
Generic ATA Broadcom 440x/47xx ethernet
HPT 343/363 PATA CS89x0
HPT 366/368 PATA Cabletron E21xx
HPT 370/370A/371/372/374/302 PATA DECchip Tulip (dc2114x) PCI
HPT 372N/302N PATA Dave ethernet support (DNET)
IT8211/2 PATA Davicom DM910x/DM980x
IT8213 PATA Early DECchip Tulip (dc2104x) PCI
Initio 162x SATA EtherExpress 16

235 R-Studio Manual
Intel ESB, ICH, PIIX3, PIIX4 PATA/SATA EtherExpressPro support/EtherExpress 10 (i82595)

Intel PATA MPIIX Generic DECchip & DIGITAL EtherWORKS
Intel PATA old PIIX PCI/EISA
Intel SCH PATA HP 10/100VG PCLAN (ISA, EISA, PCI)
JMicron PATA HP PCLAN (27245 and other 27xxx series)
Legacy ISA PATA HP PCLAN+ (27247B and 27252A)
Marvell PATA support via legacy mode ICL EtherTeam 16i/32
Marvell SATA Intel(R) PRO/100+
NETCELL Revolution RAID LP486E on board Ethernet
NVIDIA SATA Myson MTD-8xx PCI Ethernet
Nat Semi NS87410 PATA NE2000/NE1000
Nat Semi NS87415 PATA NI5010
Ninja32/Delkin Cardbus ATA NI5210
OPTI FireStar PATA NI6510
OPTI621/6215 PATA National Semiconductor DP8381x series PCI
Older Promise PATA controller Ethernet
PCMCIA PATA OpenCores 10/100 Mbps Ethernet MAC
Pacific Digital ADMA PCI NE2000 and clones support (see help)
Pacific Digital SATA QStor RDC R6040 Fast Ethernet Adapter
Platform AHCI SATA RealTek RTL-8129/8130/8139 PCI Fast Ethernet
Promise PATA 2027x Adapter
Promise SATA SX4 RealTek RTL-8139 C+ PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter
Promise SATA TX2/TX4 SEEQ8005
QDI VLB PATA SMC 9194
RADISYS 82600 PATA SMC EtherPower II
RDC PATA SMC Ultra
SC1200 PATA SMSC LAN9420 PCI ethernet adapter
SERVERWORKS OSB4/CSB5/CSB6/HT1000 SiS 900/7016 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter
PATA Silan SC92031 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter driver
ServerWorks Frodo / Apple K2 SATA Sun Cassini
SiS 964/965/966/180 SATA Sun GEM
SiS PATA Sun Happy Meal 10/100baseT
Silicon Image 3124/3132 SATA Sundance Alta
Silicon Image SATA TI ThunderLAN
ULi Electronics SATA ULi M526x controller
VIA PATA VIA Rhine
VIA SATA WD80*3
VITESSE VSC-7174 / INTEL 31244 SATA Winbond W89c840 Ethernet
Winbond SL82C105 PATA Zenith Z-Note
Winbond W83759A VLB PATA nForce Ethernet

SCSI low-level drivers Ethernet (1000 Mbit)

3ware 5/6/7/8xxx ATA-RAID Alteon AceNIC/3Com 3C985/NetGear GA620
3ware 97xx SAS/SATA-RAID Gigabit
3ware 9xxx SATA-RAID Atheros L1C Gigabit Ethernet
7000FASST SCSI Atheros L1E Gigabit Ethernet
ACARD SCSI Atheros/Attansic L1 Gigabit Ethernet
ARECA (ARC11xx/12xx/13xx/16xx) Broadcom CNIC
SATA/SAS RAID Host Adapter Broadcom NetXtremeII
Adaptec AACRAID Broadcom Tigon3
Adaptec AHA152X/2825 DL2000/TC902x-based Gigabit Ethernet
Adaptec AHA1542 IP1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Adaptec AIC79xx U320 Intel(R) 82575/82576 PCI-Express Gigabit Ethernet
Adaptec AIC7xxx Intel(R) 82576 Virtual Function Ethernet
Adaptec AIC7xxx Fast -> U160 Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Adaptec AIC94xx SAS/SATA Intel(R) PRO/1000 PCI-Express Gigabit Ethernet
Adaptec I2O RAID JMicron(R) PCI-Express Gigabit Ethernet
AdvanSys SCSI National Semiconductor DP83820
Always IN2000 SCSI New SysKonnect GigaEthernet
BusLogic SCSI Packet Engines Hamachi GNIC-II
DMX3191D SCSI Packet Engines Yellowfin Gigabit-NIC
DTC3180/3280 SCSI QLogic QLA3XXX Network Driver Support
EATA ISA/EISA/PCI (DPT and generic Realtek 8169 gigabit ethernet
EATA/DMA-compliant boards) SiS190/SiS191 gigabit ethernet
Emulex LightPulse Fibre Channel Support SysKonnect Yukon2
Future Domain 16xx SCSI/AHA-2920A VIA Velocity
Generic NCR5380/53c400 SCSI MMIO Ethernet (10000 Mbit)
Generic NCR5380/53c400 SCSI PIO Broadcom NetXtremeII 10Gb
HP Smart Array SCSI driver Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet
HighPoint RocketRAID 3xxx/4xxx Controller Chelsio Communications T3 10Gb Ethernet
IBM Power Linux RAID adapter Chelsio Communications T4 Ethernet
IBM ServeRAID Cisco VIC Ethernet NIC Support
Initio 9100U(W) Intel(R) 10GbE PCI Express adapters
Initio INI-A100U2W Intel(R) PRO/10GbE
Intel/ICP (former GDT SCSI Disk Array) RAID Mellanox Technologies 10Gbit Ethernet
Controller Myricom Myri-10G Ethernet
LSI Logic Legacy MegaRAID Driver NetXen Multi port (1/10) Gigabit Ethernet NIC
LSI Logic Management Module Neterion X3100 Series 10GbE PCIe Server Adapter
LSI Logic MegaRAID Driver QLOGIC QLCNIC 1/10Gb Converged Ethernet
LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Module NIC Support
LSI MPT Fusion SAS 2.0 Device Driver QLogic QLGE 10Gb Ethernet Driver Support
Marvell 88SE64XX/88SE94XX SAS/SATA

237 R-Studio Manual
NCR53c406a SCSI S2IO 10Gbe XFrame NIC

PAS16 SCSI ServerEngines' 10Gbps NIC - BladeEngine
PMC SIERRA Linux MaxRAID adapter Solarflare Solarstorm SFC4000/SFC9000-family
PMC-Sierra SPC 8001 SAS/SATA Based Host Sun Neptune 10Gbit Ethernet
Adapter driver Tehuti Networks 10G Ethernet
Promise SuperTrak EX Series Token Ring driver support
QLogic ISP4XXX host adapter family 3Com 3C359 Token Link Velocity XL adapter
QLogic QLA2XXX Fibre Channel Support Generic TMS380 PCI
Qlogic FAS SCSI Generic TMS380 Token Ring ISA/PCI adapter
Qlogic QLA 1240/1x80/1x160 SCSI IBM Lanstreamer chipset PCI adapter
SYM53C8XX Version 2 SCSI IBM Olympic chipset PCI adapter
Symbios 53c416 SCSI IBM Tropic chipset based adapter
Tekram DC390(T) and Am53/79C974 SCSI Madge Smart 16/4 PCI Mk2
Tekram DC395(U/UW/F) and DC315(U) SCSI Proteon ISA
Trantor T128/T128F/T228 SCSI SMC ISA/MCA adapter
UltraStor 14F/34F SysKonnect TR4/16 ISA
UltraStor SCSI
USB Network Adapters
VMware PVSCSI driver
ASIX AX88xxx Based USB 2.0 Ethernet Adapters
Workbit NinjaSCSI-32Bi/UDE
CDC EEM
USB support CDC Ethernet support (smart devices such as cable
Cypress C67x00 HCD modems)
Datafab Compact Flash Reader Davicom DM9601 based USB 1.1 10/100 ethernet
Freecom USB/ATAPI Bridge devices
ISD-200 USB/ATA Bridge GeneSys GL620USB-A based cables
ISP 1760 HCD Host for RNDIS and ActiveSync devices
ISP116X HCD MosChip MCS7830 based Ethernet adapters
ISP1362 HCD NetChip 1080 based cables (Laplink, ...)
Lexar Jumpshot Compact Flash Reader Prolific PL-2301/2302 based cables
OXU210HP HCD SMSC LAN95XX based USB 2.0 10/100 ethernet
Olympus MAUSB-10/Fuji DPC-R1 devices
R8A66597 HCD Sharp Zaurus (stock ROMs) and compatible
SL811HS HCD Simple USB Network Links (CDC Ethernet subset)
SanDisk SDDR-09 (and other SmartMedia, USB CATC NetMate-based Ethernet device
including DPCM) USB KLSI KL5USB101-based ethernet device
SanDisk SDDR-55 SmartMedia USB Pegasus/Pegasus-II based ethernet device
USB 2.0 USB RTL8150 based ethernet device
USB Mass Storage
USB Monitor
USBAT/USBAT02-based storage
xHCI HCD (USB 3.0)

Block devices
Compaq SMART2
Compaq Smart Array 5xxx
Mylex DAC960/DAC1100 PCI RAID Controller
Normal floppy disk
Promise SATA SX8
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) support
Legacy alternative FireWire driver stack
Storage devices (SBP-2 protocol)
PCMCIA network device support
3Com 3c574 PCMCIA
3Com 3c589 PCMCIA
Asix AX88190 PCMCIA
COM20020 ARCnet PCMCIA
Fujitsu FMV-J18x PCMCIA
NE2000 compatible PCMCIA
New Media PCMCIA
SMC 91Cxx PCMCIA
Xircom 16-bit PCMCIA
Other devices
Microsoft Hyper-V Utilities driver
Microsoft Hyper-V client drivers
Microsoft Hyper-V virtual block driver
Microsoft Hyper-V virtual network driver
Microsoft Hyper-V virtual storage driver

239 R-Studio Manual
VII R-Studio Agent Emergency

R-Studio Agent Emergency is a tool that allows you to start a network computer with a damaged startup disk
and recover data stored on its hard drives. Then restored data can be transferred to a working computer via the
network.
It works very simple: Just start the computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency startup disk(s) and, if
necessary, manually configure a network interface for R-Studio Agent Emergency. When started, the
computer and its hard drives can be accessed by R-Studio installed on another computer on the network.

Installing R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator
Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Disk

Disk Controllers
Network Cards
7.1 Contact Information and Technical Support
To obtain the latest version of R-Studio Agent Emergency, go to:
R-Studio Technical Support Team is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and has an average
response time less than 4 hours.
Send your support request to: http://www.r-tt.com/Support_request.html
7.2 Installing R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator
You must have administrative privileges to install R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media
Creator.
If you are not sure whether you have such privileges, you almost certainly do not have them. Contact your system
administrator for assistance.
1.Run the setup file.
2.Follow the on-screen instructions.
You may create startup disks even before the installation ends.
7.3 Creating Startup Disks

You need to create either
· A startup CD/DVD disc. You may create an ISO image, or write the disc directly from R-Studio Emergency
Startup Media Creator, if there is a CD/DVD recorder in your system.
or

R-Studio Agent Emergency 240
· A startup FAT/FAT32 removable device recognized by your system as a bootable one. The total available size
of the device should be more than 10 MB.
or
· 4 formatted floppy disks
Check the Hardware Compatibility List.
When R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator starts, its Welcome dialog box appears:
Welcome to R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator dialog box
Welcome dialog box
click the Next button to see the list of all devices on which startup disks may be created.
Startup media type selection dialog box
To create a startup CD/DVD disc directly on your CD/DVD writer (if present):
1 Run R-Studio Agent Emergency
2 Select the CD/DVD writer on the Startup media type selection dialog box and click the Next button
3 Read and accept the License Agreement and enter the R-Studio Agent registration key on the R-
Studio Agent Emergency Activation dialog box and click the Next button
Note: You should enter the registration key of R-Studio Agent, not R-Studio itself.

241 R-Studio Manual
R-Studio Agent Emergency License Agreement dialog box
R-Studio Agent Emergency Activation dialog box
if you do not enter the registration key, R-Studio Agent Emergency will work in the Demo mode. You
may enter the key later when R-Studio Agent Emergency and R-Studio establish a connection
4 Insert a blank CD/DVD disk into the CD/DVD recorder and click the Next button
Insert media disc dialog box

> R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the startup CD/DVD disc
showing the progress on the Creating startup media dialog box
When R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes creating the startup CD/DVD disc,
the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear
R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message
To create an ISO image of a startup CD/DVD disc

2 Select ISO Image for a startup CD/DVD on the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator
dialog box and click the Next button
3 Read and accept the License Agreement and enter the R-Studio Agent registration key on the R-
Studio Agent Emergency Activation dialog box and click the Next button
Note: You should enter the registration key of R-Studio Agent, not R-Studio itself.
if you do not enter the registration key, R-Studio Agent Emergency will work in the Demo mode. You
may enter the key later when R-Studio Agent Emergency and R-Studio establish a connection.
4 Select a place and file name for the ISO image of the startup CD/DVD and click the Save button
> When R-Studio Bootable Startup Media Creator finishes writing the file with the ISO image, the R-
Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear
You may either exit R-Studio Bootable Startup Media Creator by clicking the Finish button or create

243 R-Studio Manual
R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished dialog box
5 Create the startup CD/DVD using your favorite CD/DVD creation software
Load the created ISO image into the CD/DVD creation software. Consult documentation for the software
for details.
To create a startup FAT/FAT32 removable device
2 Select the removable device on the Startup media type selection dialog box and click the Next button
3 Read and accept the License Agreement and enter the registration key on the R-Studio Agent
Emergency Activation dialog box and click the Next button
4 Check that the correct FAT/FAT32-formatted device is selected and click the Next button
Confirm device selection dialog box
> R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the startup USB disk showing
the progress on the Creating startup media dialog box
When R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator finishes creating the startup device, the
R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear

To create floppy disks:

You will need 4 formatted floppy disks.
2 Select Floppy Disk for the startup floppy disk on the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media
Creator dialog box and click the Next button
3 Enter the registration information and number on the Registration dialog box and click the Next button
If you leave all the field blank, R-Studio Agent Emergency will work with the Demo-version limitations
4 Insert the floppy disk and click the Next button on the Insert floppy dialog box
Insert floppy dialog box
> R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator will start creating the startup floppy disk
showing the progress on the Creating startup media dialog box

245 R-Studio Manual
5 Insert the second floppy disk and click the OK button when the Please insert formatted diskette #2
into drive A: message will appear
Do it with the next 2 floppy disks.

> When R-Studio Startup Media Creator finishes creating the startup floppy disk, the R-Studio Agent
Emergency Startup Media Creation is Finished message will appear. You may either exit R-Studio
Startup Media Creator by clicking the Finish button or create another startup media by clicking the
Back button.
7.4 Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency

Startup Disk
We recommended that you print out this help page and have the hardcopy on hand while you are
performing this action.
Before you start the computer you should be aware that your network has a DHCP server or you
know the computer's IP address and network mask.
If there is a non-IDE disk controller in your system, or you plan to use network disks or external hardware
devices, first check the Hardware Compatibility List.
If you plan to use any external device, turn it on before starting the system.
If the motherboard in your computer supports the Serial ATA (SATA) devices, but IDE disks are also present,
only the SATA devices should be set to the Enhanced Mode in BIOS.
To start the computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency startup disks
1 Make sure that the first startup device in the system BIOS is the device from which you plan to start
your computer (a CD/DVD drive or A (Floppy))
system documentation for details. Refer to your system documentation for details.
2 Insert the R-Studio Agent Emergency startup CD/DVD disc, a removable device, or the first floppy disk
and start your computer
> R-Studio Agent Emergency will start and its prompt will appear
If you start your computer with floppy disks, you'll see prompts to insert a next floppy disk.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Booting R-Studio Emergency. Please wait...

Waiting 8 seconds for PCMCIA devices to settle

Booting R-Studio Agent Emergency. Now you may remove floppy.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Querying DHCP to configure network interfaces...
Press ENTER within 10 seconds to configure them manually.
If your network has a DHCP server
The computer running R-Studio Agent Emergency will be assigned an IP address automatically
A prompt with a computer address will appear. You need to remember it to access the computer via
network.
If your network does not have a DHCP server
You need to configure the interfaces and IP addresses manually.
1. A prompt to select an interface will appear. Enter the selected interface name and press Enter.
2. A prompt to enter its IP address and optional subnet mask will appear. Enter the IP address and optional
subnet mask and press Enter.
------------------------[ List of
Interfaces ]--------------------------------
Name IP Address NETMASK Vendor
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
re0 Unconfigured RealTek
8139C+
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
# Enter interface name, 'gw' for default gateway or just press
ENTER to finish
#>re0
# Enter IP address and optional NETMASK delimited by space
#>192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0
3. A prompt to configure another interface, gateway, or to finish configuring the interfaces will appear. Enter
gw, enter the IP address of the gateway, and press Enter.
------------------------[ List of
Interfaces ]--------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
re0 Unconfigured RealTek
8139C+
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
ENTER to finish
#>re0
# Enter IP address and optional NETMASK delimited by space
#>192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0
------------------------[ List of
Interfaces ]--------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------

247 R-Studio Manual
re0 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 RealTek

8139C+
gw Unconfigured Default
gateway
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
ENTER to finish
#>gw
# Enter default gateway IP Address
#>192.168.0.1
------------------------[ List of
Interfaces ]--------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
re0 192.168.0.10 255.255.255.0 RealTek
8139C+
gw 192.168.0.1 Default
gateway
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------
ENTER to finish
#>
4. Press Enter to finish configuring the interfaces, or enter the name of the next interface to configure.
> R-Studio Agent Emergency will show a prompt that is ready to accept connections
* R-Studio Agent started and ready to accept connections...
* You may press ENTER to start to remote R-Studio...
Now the computer may be accessed by R-Studio via network.
Secure boot:
It may be impossible to start a Windows 8 certified computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency startup disk without some
When Secure boot is disabled, it should be possible to start the computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency startup disk.
Starting a Connection from R-Studio Agent Emergency

When you need to connect R-Studio and R-Studio Agent Emergency over the Internet, it may be necessary
to start the connection from the computer where R-Studio Agent Emergency is running.

To connect to R-Studio's computer,

1 Press the Enter key and enter the IP address of the computer where R-Studio is running as
IPaddress:port.
* You may press ENTER to start connection to remote R-Studio...
# Enter R-Studio IP address or just press ENTER to cancel>
192.168.0.25:80
The default port is 8080, and you don't have to specify it.
2 Enter the password if required, and press the Enter key.
192.168.0.25:80
# Enter password or just press ENTER to connect without
one>PaSsWoRd1234
> When the connection is established successfully, R-Studio Agent Emergency will notify you about
this.
192.168.0.25:80
# Enter password or just press ENTER to connect without
one>PaSsWoRd1234
Connection with 192.168.0.25:80 is established successfully.
7.5 R-Studio Agent Emergency Hardware Compatibility List

Disk Controllers
Network Cards

Installing R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Media Creator
Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup Disk
7.5.1 Disk Controllers
R-Studio Agent Emergency is based on the FreeBSD 5.3 kernel and supports devices from the list published
at http://www.freebsd.org/releases/5.3R/hardware-i386.html.
*: Supported in the floppy version
Disk controllers
IDE/ATA controllers ( ata driver) *
The adapters supported by the aic driver include:
Adaptec AHA-1505 (ISA)
Adaptec AHA-1510A, AHA-1510B (ISA)

249 R-Studio Manual

Adaptec AHA-1535 (ISA)
Creative Labs SoundBlaster SCSI host adapter (ISA)
Adaptec AHA-1460, AHA-1460B, AHA-1460C, AHA-1460D (PC Card)
Adaptec AHA-1030B, AHA-1030P (PC98)
NEC PC-9801-100 (PC98)
The aha driver supports the following SCSI host adapters:
Adaptec AHA-154xB
Adaptec AHA-154xC
Adaptec AHA-154xCF
Adaptec AHA-154xCP
Adaptec AHA-1640
Adaptec AHA-174x in 154x emulation mode
DTC 3290 SCSI controller in 1542 emulation mode
Tekram SCSI controllers in 154x emulation mode
The ahb driver supports the following SCSI host adapters:
Adaptec AHA-1740
Adaptec AHA-1742
Adaptec AHA-1740A
Adaptec AHA-1742A
The ahc driver supports the following SCSI host adapter chips and SCSI controller cards:
Adaptec AIC7770 host adapter chip
Adaptec 274X(W)
Adaptec 274X(T)
Adaptec 284X
Adaptec 2910
Adaptec 2915
Adaptec 2920
Adaptec 2930C
Adaptec 2930U2
Adaptec 2940
Adaptec 2940J
Adaptec 2940N

Adaptec 2940U
Adaptec 2940AU
Adaptec 2940UW
Adaptec 2940UW Dual
Adaptec 2940UW Pro
Adaptec 2940U2W
Adaptec 2940U2B
Adaptec 2950U2W
Adaptec 2950U2B
Adaptec 19160B
Adaptec 29160B
Adaptec 29160N
Adaptec 3940
Adaptec 3940U
Adaptec 3940AU
Adaptec 3940UW
Adaptec 3940AUW
Adaptec 3940U2W
Adaptec 3950U2
Adaptec 3960
Adaptec 39160
Adaptec 3985
Adaptec 4944UW
NEC PC-9821Xt13 (PC-98)
NEC RvII26 (PC-98)
NEC PC-9821X-B02L/B09 (PC-98)
NEC SV-98/2-B03 (PC-98)
Many motherboards with on-board SCSI support
The ahd driver supports the following:
Adaptec AIC7901A host adapter chip
Adaptec 29320 host adapter
Adaptec 39320 host adapter
Many motherboards with on-board SCSI support
Controllers supported by the aac driver include:
Adaptec AAC-364
Adaptec SCSI RAID 2120S
Adaptec SCSI RAID 2410SA
Adaptec SCSI RAID 2810SA
Dell CERC SATA RAID 2
Dell PERC 2/Si
251 R-Studio Manual
Dell PERC 2/QC

Dell PERC 3/Si
Dell PERC 3/Di
Dell PERC 320/DC
HP NetRAID 4M
The adv driver supports the following SCSI controllers:
AdvanSys ABP510/5150
AdvanSys ABP5140
AdvanSys ABP5142
AdvanSys ABP902/3902
AdvanSys ABP3905
AdvanSys ABP915
AdvanSys ABP920
AdvanSys ABP3922
AdvanSys ABP3925
AdvanSys ABP930, ABP930U, ABP930UA
AdvanSys ABP960, ABP960U
AdvanSys ABP542
AdvanSys ABP742
AdvanSys ABP842
AdvanSys ABP940
AdvanSys ABP940UA/3940UA
AdvanSys ABP940U
AdvanSys ABP3960UA
AdvanSys ABP752
AdvanSys ABP852
AdvanSys ABP950
AdvanSys ABP980UA/3980UA
MELCO IFC-USP (PC-98)
RATOC REX-PCI30 (PC-98)
@Nifty FNECHARD IFC-USUP-TX (PC-98)
The adw driver supports SCSI controllers including:
AdvanSys ABP940UW/ABP3940UW
AdvanSys ABP950UW
AdvanSys ABP970UW
AdvanSys ABP3940U2W
AdvanSys ABP3950U2W
The bt driver supports the following BusLogic MultiMaster ``W'', ``C'', ``S'', and `À'' series and compatible
SCSI host adapters:
BusLogic BT-445C
BusLogic BT-445S
BusLogic BT-540CF
BusLogic BT-542B
BusLogic BT-542B
BusLogic BT-542D
BusLogic BT-545C
BusLogic BT-545S
BusLogic/BusTek BT-640
BusLogic BT-742A
BusLogic BT-742A
BusLogic BT-747C
BusLogic BT-747D
BusLogic BT-747S
BusLogic BT-757C
BusLogic BT-757CD
BusLogic BT-757D
BusLogic BT-757S
BusLogic BT-946C
BusLogic BT-948
BusLogic BT-956C
BusLogic BT-956CD
BusLogic BT-958
BusLogic BT-958D
Storage Dimensions SDC3211B / SDC3211F
AMI FastDisk Host Adapters that are true BusLogic MultiMaster clones are also supported by the bt driver.
The dpt driver provides support for the following RAID adapters:
DPT Smart Cache Plus
Smart Cache II (PM2?2?, PM2022 [EISA], PM2024/PM2124 [PCI]) (Gen2)
Smart RAID II (PM3?2?, PM3021, PM3222)
Smart Cache III (PM2?3?)
Smart RAID III (PM3?3?, PM3332 [EISA], PM3334UW [PCI]) (Gen3)
Smart Cache IV (PM2?4?, PM2042 [EISA], PM2044/PM2144 [PCI]) (Gen4)
Smart RAID IV
The adapters currently supported by the asr driver include the following:
Adaptec Zero-Channel SCSI RAID 2000S, 2005S, 2010S, 2015S
Adaptec SCSI RAID 2100S, 2110S
Adaptec ATA-100 RAID 2400A
Adaptec SmartRAID PM1554
Adaptec SmartRAID PM3755U2B / SmartRAID V Millennium
253 R-Studio Manual

DEC KZPCC-AC (LVD 1-ch, 4MB or 16MB cache), DEC KZPCC-CE (LVD 3-ch, 64MB cache), DEC
KZPCC-XC (LVD 1-ch, 16MB cache), DEC KZPCC-XE (LVD 3-ch, 64MB cache) -- rebadged
SmartRAID V Millennium
The amr driver supports the following:
AMI MegaRAID 320-1
AMI MegaRAID 320-2
AMI MegaRAID 320-4X
AMI MegaRAID Series 418
AMI MegaRAID Enterprise 1200 (Series 428)
AMI MegaRAID Elite 1500 (Series 467)
AMI MegaRAID Elite 1600 (Series 493)
AMI MegaRAID Elite 1650 (Series 4xx)
AMI MegaRAID Express 100 (Series 466WS)
AMI MegaRAID Express 200 (Series 466)
Dell PERC
Dell PERC 2/SC
Dell PERC 2/DC
Dell PERC 3/DCL
Dell PERC 3/QC
Dell PERC 4/Di
HP NetRAID-1/Si
HP NetRAID-3/Si (D4943A)
HP Embedded NetRAID
Note: Booting from these controllers is supported. EISA adapters are not supported.
Controllers supported by the mlx driver include:
Mylex DAC960P
Mylex DAC960PD / DEC KZPSC (Fast Wide)
Mylex DAC960PDU
Mylex DAC960PL
Mylex DAC960PJ
Mylex DAC960PG
Mylex DAC960PU / DEC PZPAC (Ultra Wide)
Mylex AcceleRAID 150 (DAC960PRL)
Mylex AcceleRAID 250 (DAC960PTL1)
Mylex eXtremeRAID 1100 (DAC1164P)
RAIDarray 230 controllers, aka the Ultra-SCSI DEC KZPAC-AA (1-ch, 4MB cache), KZPAC-CA (3-ch,
4MB), KZPAC-CB (3-ch, 8MB cache)

All major firmware revisions (2.x, 3.x, 4.x and 5.x) are supported, however it is always advisable to upgrade to
the most recent firmware available for the controller. Compatible Mylex controllers not listed should work, but
have not been verified.
Note: Booting from these controllers is supported. EISA adapters are not supported.
Controllers supported by the mly driver include:
Mylex AcceleRAID 160
Mylex eXtremeRAID 2000
Mylex eXtremeRAID 3000
Compatible Mylex controllers not listed should work, but have not been verified.
The twe driver supports the following ATA RAID controllers:
AMCC's 3ware 5000 series
AMCC's 3ware 6000 series
AMCC's 3ware 7000-2
AMCC's 3ware 7006-2
AMCC's 3ware 7500-4LP
AMCC's 3ware 7500-8
AMCC's 3ware 7500-12
AMCC's 3ware 7506-8
AMCC's 3ware 8500-8
AMCC's 3ware 8506-8
AMCC's 3ware 8506-8MI
AMCC's 3ware 8506-12MI
The twa driver supports the following PATA/SATA RAID controllers:
AMCC's 3ware 9500S-4LP
AMCC's 3ware 9500S-8
AMCC's 3ware 9500S-8MI
AMCC's 3ware 9500S-12
AMCC's 3ware 9500S-12MI
The ncr driver provides support for the following NCR/Symbios SCSI controller chips:
53C810
53C810A
53C815
53C820
53C825A
53C860

255 R-Studio Manual
53C875
53C875J
53C885
53C895
53C895A
53C896
53C1510D
The following add-on boards are known to be supported:
I-O DATA SC-98/PCI (PC-98)
I-O DATA SC-PCI (PC-98)
The sym driver provides support for the following Symbios/LSI Logic PCI SCSI controllers:
53C810
53C810A
53C815
53C825
53C825A
53C860
53C875
53C876
53C895
53C895A
53C896
53C897
53C1000
53C1000R
53C1010-33
53C1010-66
53C1510D
The SCSI controllers supported by sym can be either embedded on a motherboard, or on one of the
following add-on boards:
ASUS SC-200, SC-896
Data Technology DTC3130 (all variants)
DawiControl DC2976UW
Diamond FirePort (all)
I-O DATA SC-UPCI (PC-98)
Logitec LHA-521UA (PC-98)
NCR cards (all)
Symbios cards (all)
Tekram DC390W, 390U, 390F, 390U2B, 390U2W, 390U3D, and 390U3W
Tyan S1365
The following devices are currently supported by the ncv driver:
I-O DATA PCSC-DV
KME KXLC002 (TAXAN ICD-400PN, etc.), KXLC004, and UJDCD450
Macnica Miracle SCSI-II mPS110

Media Intelligent MSC-110, MSC-200

NEC PC-9801N-J03R
New Media Corporation BASICS SCSI
Qlogic Fast SCSI
RATOC REX-9530, REX-5572 (SCSI only)
Controllers supported by the stg driver include:
Adaptec 2920/A
Future Domain SCSI2GO
Future Domain TMC-18XX/3260
IBM SCSI PCMCIA Card
ICM PSC-2401 SCSI
MELCO IFC-SC
RATOC REX-5536, REX-5536AM, REX-5536M, REX-9836A
Note that the Adaptec 2920C is supported by the ahc driver.
Cards supported by the isp driver include:
ISP1000
PTI SBS440
ISP1020
ISP1040
PTI SBS450
Qlogic 1240
Qlogic 1020
Qlogic 1040
Qlogic 1080
Qlogic 1280
Qlogic 12160
Qlogic 2100
Qlogic 2102
Qlogic 2200
Qlogic 2202
Qlogic 2204
Qlogic 2300
Qlogic 2312
PTI SBS470
Antares P-0033
Controllers supported by the amd driver include:
MELCO IFC-DP (PC-98)
Tekram DC390
Tekram DC390T
Controllers supported by the nsp driver include:
Alpha-Data AD-PCS201
I-O DATA CBSC16
Adaptec AIC-7110 Parallel to SCSI interfaces ( vpo driver)

257 R-Studio Manual
The following controllers are supported by the ida driver:

Compaq SMART Array 221
Compaq Integrated SMART Array Controller
Compaq SMART Array 4200
Compaq SMART Array 4250ES
Compaq SMART 3200 Controller
Compaq SMART 3100ES Controller
Compaq SMART-2/DH Controller
Compaq SMART-2/SL Controller
Compaq SMART-2/P Controller
Compaq SMART-2/E Controller
Compaq SMART Controller
Controllers supported by the ciss driver include:
Compaq Smart Array 5300
Compaq Smart Array 532
Compaq Smart Array 5i
HP Smart Array 5312
HP Smart Array 6i
HP Smart Array 641
HP Smart Array 642
HP Smart Array 6400
HP Smart Array 6400 EM
HP Smart Array 6422
HP Smart Array V100
HP Modular Smart Array 20 (MSA20)
HP Modular Smart Array 500 (MSA500)
Controllers supported by the iir driver include:
Intel RAID Controller SRCMR
Intel Server RAID Controller U3-l (SRCU31a)
Intel Server RAID Controller U3-1L (SRCU31La)
Intel Server RAID Controller U3-2 (SRCU32)
All past and future releases of Intel and ICP RAID Controllers.
Intel RAID Controller SRCU21 (discontinued)
Intel RAID Controller SRCU31 (older revision, not compatible)
Intel RAID Controller SRCU31L (older revision, not compatible)
The SRCU31 and SRCU31L can be updated via a firmware update available from Intel.
Promise SuperTrak ATA RAID controllers (pst driver)
The hptmv driver supports the HighPoint RocketRAID 182x SATA controllers.
Controllers supported by the ips driver include:
IBM ServeRAID 3H
ServeRAID 4L/4M/4H
ServeRAID Series 5
ServeRAID 6i/6M

The following controllers are supported by the mpt driver:

LSI Logic 53c1030 (Dual Ultra320 SCSI)
LSI Logic FC909 (1Gb/s Fibre Channel)
LSI Logic FC909A (Dual 1Gb/s Fibre Channel)
LSI Logic FC919 (2Gb/s Fibre Channel)
LSI Logic FC929 (Dual 2Gb/s Fibre Channel)
The SCSI controller chips supprted by the mpt driver can be found onboard on many systems including:
Dell PowerEdge 1750
IBM eServer xSeries 335
SCSI controllers supported by the trm driver include:
Tekram DC-315 PCI Ultra SCSI adapter without BIOS and internal SCSI connector
Tekram DC-315U PCI Ultra SCSI adapter without BIOS
Tekram DC-395F PCI Ultra-Wide SCSI adapter with flash BIOS and 68-pin external SCSI connector
Tekram DC-395U PCI Ultra SCSI adapter with flash BIOS
Tekram DC-395UW PCI Ultra-Wide SCSI adapter with flash BIOS
Tekram DC-395U2W PCI Ultra2-Wide SCSI adapter with flash BIOS
For the Tekram DC-310/U and DC-390F/U/UW/U2B/U2W/U3W PCI SCSI host adapters, use the sym
driver.
The wds driver supports the WD7000 SCSI controller.
7.5.2 Network Cards
R-Studio Agent Emergency is based on the FreeBSD 5.3 kernel and supports devices from the list published
at http://www.freebsd.org/releases/5.3R/hardware-i386.html.
*: Supported in the floppy version
Ethernet NICs
Adapters supported by the sf driver include:
ANA-62011 64-bit single port 10/100baseTX adapter
ANA-62022 64-bit dual port 10/100baseTX adapter
ANA-62044 64-bit quad port 10/100baseTX adapter
ANA-69011 32-bit single port 10/100baseTX adapter
ANA-62020 64-bit single port 100baseFX adapter
The ti driver supports Gigabit Ethernet adapters based on the Alteon Tigon I and II chips. The ti driver has
been tested with the following adapters:
3Com 3c985-SX Gigabit Ethernet adapter (Tigon 1)
3Com 3c985B-SX Gigabit Ethernet adapter (Tigon 2)
Alteon AceNIC V Gigabit Ethernet adapter (1000baseSX)
Alteon AceNIC V Gigabit Ethernet adapter (1000baseT)
Digital EtherWORKS 1000SX PCI Gigabit adapter
Netgear GA620 Gigabit Ethernet adapter (1000baseSX)
Netgear GA620T Gigabit Ethernet adapter (1000baseT)
The following adapters should also be supported but have not yet been tested:
Asante GigaNIX1000T Gigabit Ethernet adapter
Asante PCI 1000BASE-SX Gigabit Ethernet adapter
Farallon PN9000SX Gigabit Ethernet adapter

259 R-Studio Manual
NEC Gigabit Ethernet

Silicon Graphics PCI Gigabit Ethernet adapter
The pcn driver supports adapters and embedded controllers based on the AMD PCnet/FAST, PCnet/FAST+,
PCnet/FAST III, PCnet/PRO and PCnet/Home Fast Ethernet chips:
AMD Am53C974/Am79C970/Am79C974 PCnet-PCI *
AMD Am79C970A PCnet-PCI II *
AMD Am79C971 PCnet-FAST *
AMD Am79C972 PCnet-FAST+ *
AMD Am79C973/Am79C975 PCnet-FAST III *
AMD Am79C976 PCnet-PRO *
AMD PCnet/Home HomePNA
Allied-Telesis LA-PCI
Contec C-NET(98)S (PC-98)
NEC SV-98/2-B05, B06
The lnc driver supports the following adapters:
Novell NE2100 *
Novell NE32-VL *
Isolan AT 4141-0 (16 bit)
Isolan BICC
Isolink 4110 (8 bit)
Diamond HomeFree
Digital DEPCA
Hewlett Packard Vectra 486/66XM
Hewlett Packard Vectra XU
Also supported are adapters working with the pcn driver. The lnc driver runs these in compatibility mode, thus
the pcn driver should be preferred.
SMC 83c17x (EPIC)-based Ethernet NICs (tx driver)
The ed driver supports the following Ethernet NICs:
3Com 3c503 Etherlink II
AR-P500 Ethernet
Accton EN1644 (old model), EN1646 (old model), EN2203 (old model) (110pin) (flags 0xd00000)
Accton EN2212/EN2216/UE2216
Allied Telesis CentreCOM LA100-PCM_V2
Allied Telesis LA-98 (flags 0x000000) (PC-98)
Allied Telesis SIC-98, SIC-98NOTE (110pin), SIU-98 (flags 0x600000) (PC-98)
Allied Telesis SIU-98-D (flags 0x610000) (PC-98)
AmbiCom 10BaseT card
Bay Networks NETGEAR FA410TXC Fast Ethernet
CNet BC40 adapter
Compex Net-A adapter
Contec C-NET(98), RT-1007(98), C-NET(9N) (110pin) (flags 0xa00000) (PC-98)
Contec C-NET(98)E-A, C-NET(98)L-A, C-NET(98)P (flags 0x300000) (PC-98)
Corega Ether98-T (flags 0x000000) (PC-98)
Corega Ether PCC-T/EtherII PCC-T/FEther PCC-TXF/PCC-TXD
CyQ've ELA-010
DEC EtherWorks DE305

Danpex EN-6200P2
D-Link DE-298, DE-298P (flags 0x500000) (PC-98)
D-Link DE-650/660
D-Link IC-CARD/IC-CARD+ Ethernet
ELECOM LD-98P (flags 0x500000) (PC-98)
ELECOM LD-BDN, LD-NW801G (flags 0x200000) (PC-98)
ELECOM Laneed LD-CDL/TX, LD-CDF, LD-CDS, LD-10/100CD, LD-CDWA (DP83902A)
HP PC Lan+ 27247B and 27252A
IBM Creditcard Ethernet I/II
ICM AD-ET2-T, DT-ET-25, DT-ET-T5, IF-2766ET, IF-2771ET, NB-ET-T (110pin) (flags 0x500000)
(PC-98)
I-O DATA LA/T-98, LA/T-98SB, LA2/T-98, ET/T-98 (flags 0x900000) (PC-98)
I-O DATA ET2/T-PCI
I-O DATA PCLATE
Kansai KLA-98C/T (flags 0x900000) (PC-98)
Kingston KNE-PC2, KNE-PCM/x Ethernet
Linksys EC2T/PCMPC100/PCM100, PCMLM56
Linksys EtherFast 10/100 PC Card, Combo PCMCIA Ethernet Card (PCMPC100 V2)
Logitec LAN-98T (flags 0xb00000) (PC-98)
MACNICA Ethernet ME1 for JEIDA
MACNICA ME98 (flags 0x900000) (PC-98)
MACNICA NE2098 (flags 0x400000) (PC-98)
MELCO EGY-98 (flags 0x300000) (PC-98)
MELCO LGH-98, LGY-98, LGY-98-N (110pin), IND-SP, IND-SS (flags 0x400000) (PC-98)
MELCO LGY-PCI-TR
MELCO LPC-T/LPC2-T/LPC2-CLT/LPC2-TX/LPC3-TX/LPC3-CLX
NDC Ethernet Instant-Link
NEC PC-9801-77, PC-9801-78 (flags 0x910000) (PC-98)
NEC PC-9801-107, PC-9801-108 (flags 0x800000) (PC-98)
National Semiconductor InfoMover NE4100
NetGear FA-410TX
NetVin 5000
Network Everywhere Ethernet 10BaseT PC Card
Networld 98X3 (flags 0xd00000) (PC-98)
Networld EC-98X, EP-98X (flags 0xd10000) (PC-98)
Novell NE1000/NE2000/NE2100
PLANEX ENW-8300-T
PLANEX EN-2298-C (flags 0x200000) (PC-98)
PLANEX EN-2298P-T, EN-2298-T (flags 0x500000) (PC-98)
PLANEX FNW-3600-T
RealTek 8029
SMC Elite 16 WD8013
SMC Elite Ultra
SMC EtherEZ98 (flags 0x000000) (PC-98)

261 R-Studio Manual
SMC WD8003E/WD8003EBT/WD8003S/WD8003SBT/WD8003W/WD8013EBT/WD8013W and

clones
Socket LP-E
Surecom EtherPerfect EP-427
Surecom NE-34
TDK LAK-CD031, Grey Cell GCS2000 Ethernet Card
Telecom Device SuperSocket RE450T
VIA VT86C926
Winbond W89C940
C-Bus, ISA, PCI and PC Card devices are supported.
Adapters supported by the rl driver include:
Accton ``Cheetah'' EN1207D (MPX 5030/5038; RealTek 8139 clone)
Allied Telesyn AT2550
Allied Telesyn AT2500TX
Belkin F5D5000
BUFFALO(Melco INC.) LPC-CB-CLX(CardBus)
Compaq HNE-300
CompUSA no-name 10/100 PCI Ethernet NIC
Corega FEther CB-TXD
Corega FEtherII CB-TXD
D-Link DFE-530TX+
D-Link DFE-538TX (same as 530+?)
D-Link DFE-690TXD
Edimax EP-4103DL CardBus
Encore ENL832-TX 10/100 M PCI
Farallon NetLINE 10/100 PCI
Genius GF100TXR,
GigaFast Ethernet EE100-AXP
KTX-9130TX 10/100 Fast Ethernet
LevelOne FPC-0106TX
Longshine LCS-8038TX-R
NDC Communications NE100TX-E
Netronix Inc. EA-1210 NetEther 10/100
Nortel Networks 10/100BaseTX
OvisLink LEF-8129TX
OvisLink LEF-8139TX
Peppercon AG ROL-F
Planex FNW-3800-TX
SMC EZ Card 10/100 PCI 1211-TX
SOHO(PRAGMATIC) UE-1211C
The wb driver supports Winbond W89C840F based Fast Ethernet adapters and embedded controllers
including:
Trendware TE100-PCIE *

The vr driver supports VIA Technologies Rhine I, Rhine II, and Rhine III based Fast Ethernet adapters
including:
D-Link DFE530-TX
Hawking Technologies PN102TX
AOpen/Acer ALN-320
The sis driver supports Silicon Integrated Systems SiS 900 * and SiS 7016 * based Fast Ethernet adapters
and embedded controllers, as well as Fast Ethernet adapters based on the National Semiconductor
DP83815 (MacPhyter) chip. Supported adapters include:
@Nifty FNECHARD IFC USUP-TX
MELCO LGY-PCI-TXC
Netgear FA311-TX (DP83815)
Netgear FA312-TX (DP83815)
SiS 630, 635, and 735 motherboard chipsets
The nge driver supports National Semiconductor DP83820 * and DP83821 based Gigabit Ethernet adapters
including:
SMC EZ Card 1000 (SMC9462TX)
D-Link DGE-500T
Asante FriendlyNet GigaNIX 1000TA and 1000TPC
Addtron AEG320T
LinkSys EG1032 (32-bit PCI) and EG1064 (64-bit PCI)
Surecom Technology EP-320G-TX
Netgear GA622T
Netgear GA621
Ark PC SOHO-GA2500T (32-bit PCI) and SOHO-GA2000T (64-bit PCI)
Trendware TEG-PCITX (32-bit PCI) and TEG-PCITX2 (64-bit PCI)
The ste driver supports Sundance Technologies ST201 based Fast Ethernet adapters and embedded
controllers including:
D-Link DFE-530TXS
D-Link DFE-550TX
Adapters supported by the sk driver include:
3COM 3C940 single port, 1000baseT adapter
Belkin F5D5005 single port, 1000baseT adapter
Linksys EG1032 single port, 1000baseT adapter
SK-9521 SK-NET GE-T single port, 1000baseT adapter
SK-9821 SK-NET GE-T single port, 1000baseT adapter *
SK-9822 SK-NET GE-T dual port, 1000baseT adapter *
SK-9841 SK-NET GE-LX single port, single mode fiber adapter *
SK-9842 SK-NET GE-LX dual port, single mode fiber adapter *
SK-9843 SK-NET GE-SX single port, multimode fiber adapter *
SK-9844 SK-NET GE-SX dual port, multimode fiber adapter *
SMC 9452TX single port, 1000baseT adapter
The tl driver supports Texas Instruments ThunderLAN based Ethernet and Fast Ethernet adapters including
a large number of Compaq PCI Ethernet adapters. Also supported are:
Olicom OC-2135/2138 10/100 TX UTP adapter
Olicom OC-2325/OC-2326 10/100 TX UTP adapter

263 R-Studio Manual
Racore 8148 10baseT/100baseTX/100baseFX adapter

Racore 8165 10/100baseTX adapter
The tl driver also supports the built-in Ethernet adapters of various Compaq Prosignia servers and
Compaq Deskpro desktop machines including:
Compaq Netelligent 10
Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP/Coax
Compaq Netelligent 10/100
Compaq Netelligent 10/100 Dual-Port
Compaq Netelligent 10/100 Proliant
Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP
Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP
Compaq NetFlex 3P
Compaq NetFlex 3P Integrated
Compaq NetFlex 3P w/BNC
The dc driver provides support for the following chipsets: *
DEC/Intel 21143
ADMtek AL981 Comet, AN985 Centaur, ADM9511 Centaur II and ADM9513 Centaur II
ASIX Electronics AX88140A and AX88141
Conexant LANfinity RS7112 (miniPCI)
Davicom DM9009, DM9100, DM9102 and DM9102A
Lite-On 82c168 and 82c169 PNIC
Lite-On/Macronix 82c115 PNIC II
Macronix 98713, 98713A, 98715, 98715A, 98715AEC-C, 98725, 98727 and 98732
Xircom X3201 (cardbus only)
The following NICs are known to work with the dc driver at this time:
3Com OfficeConnect 10/100B (ADMtek AN985 Centaur-P)
Abocom FE2500
Accton EN1217 (98715A)
Accton EN2242 MiniPCI
Adico AE310TX (98715A)
Alfa Inc GFC2204 (ASIX AX88140A)
Built in 10Mbps only Ethernet on Compaq Presario 7900 series desktops (21143, non-MII)
Built in DE500-BA on DEC Alpha workstations (21143, non-MII)
Built in Sun DMFE 10/100 Mbps Ethernet on Sun Netra X1 and Sun Fire V100 (DM9102A, MII)
Built in Ethernet on LinkSys EtherFast 10/100 Instant GigaDrive (DM9102, MII)
CNet Pro110B (ASIX AX88140A)
CNet Pro120A (98715A or 98713A) and CNet Pro120B (98715)
Compex RL100-TX (98713 or 98713A)
D-Link DFE-570TX (21143, MII, quad port)
Digital DE500-BA 10/100 (21143, non-MII)
ELECOM Laneed LD-CBL/TXA (ADMtek AN985)
Hawking CB102 CardBus
IBM EtherJet Cardbus Adapter
Intel PRO/100 Mobile Cardbus (versions that use the X3201 chipset)
Jaton XpressNet (Davicom DM9102)
Kingston KNE100TX (21143, MII)

Kingston KNE110TX (PNIC 82c169)
LinkSys LNE100TX (PNIC 82c168, 82c169)
LinkSys LNE100TX v2.0 (PNIC II 82c115)
LinkSys LNE100TX v4.0/4.1 (ADMtek AN985 Centaur-P)
Matrox FastNIC 10/100 (PNIC 82c168, 82c169)
Melco LGY-PCI-TXL
Microsoft MN-120 10/100 CardBus (ADMTek Centaur-C)
Microsoft MN-130 10/100 PCI (ADMTek Centaur-P)
NDC SOHOware SFA110A (98713A)
NDC SOHOware SFA110A Rev B4 (98715AEC-C)
NetGear FA310-TX Rev. D1, D2 or D3 (PNIC 82c169)
Netgear FA511
PlaneX FNW-3602-T (ADMtek AN985)
SMC EZ Card 10/100 1233A-TX (ADMtek AN985)
SVEC PN102-TX (98713)
Xircom Cardbus Realport
Xircom Cardbus Ethernet 10/100
Xircom Cardbus Ethernet II 10/100
Adapters supported by the aue driver include:
Abocom UFE1000, DSB650TX_NA
Accton USB320-EC, SpeedStream
ADMtek AN986, AN8511
Billionton USB100, USB100LP, USB100EL, USBE100
Corega Ether FEther USB-T, FEther USB-TX, FEther USB-TXS
D-Link DSB-650, DSB-650TX, DSB-650TX-PNA
Elecom LD-USBL/TX
Elsa Microlink USB2Ethernet
HP hn210e
I-O Data USB ETTX
Kingston KNU101TX
LinkSys USB10T adapters that contain the AN986 Pegasus chipset, USB10TA, USB10TX, USB100TX,
USB100H1
MELCO LUA-TX, LUA2-TX
Planex UE-200TX
Sandberg USB to Network Link (model number 133-06)
Siemens Speedstream
SmartBridges smartNIC
SMC 2202USB
SOHOware NUB100
The cue driver supports CATC USB-EL1210A based USB Ethernet adapters including:
Belkin F5U011/F5U111
CATC Netmate
CATC Netmate II
SmartBridges SmartLink
265 R-Studio Manual
The kue driver supports Kawasaki LSI KL5KLUSB101B based USB Ethernet adapters including:
3Com 3c19250
3Com 3c460 HomeConnect Ethernet USB Adapter
ADS Technologies USB-10BT
AOX USB101
ATen UC10T
Abocom URE 450
Corega USB-T
D-Link DSB-650C
Entrega NET-USB-E45, NET-HUB-3U1E
I/O Data USB ETT
Kawasaki DU-H3E
LinkSys USB10T
Netgear EA101
Peracom USB Ethernet Adapter
SMC 2102USB, 2104USB
The axe driver supports ASIX Electronics AX88172 based USB Ethernet adapters including:
Buffalo (Melco Inc.) LUA-U2-KTX
D-Link DUBE100
LinkSys USB200M
Netgear FA120
System TALKS Inc. SGC-X2UL
The rue driver supports RealTek RTL8150 based USB Ethernet adapters including:
Buffalo (Melco Inc.) LUA-KTX
Green House GH-USB100B
LinkSys USB100M
Billionton 10/100 FastEthernet USBKR2
The udav driver supports the following adapters:
Corega FEther USB-TXC
Adapters supported by the de driver include:
Adaptec ANA-6944/TX
Cogent EM100FX and EM440TX
Corega FastEther PCI-TX
D-Link DFE-500TX
DEC DE435, DE425, DEC DE450, and DEC DE500
ELECOM LD-PCI2T, LD-PCITS
I-O DATA LA2/T-PCI
SMC Etherpower 8432, 9332 and 9334
ZNYX ZX3xx
Controllers and cards supported by the fe driver include:
Allied Telesis RE1000, RE1000Plus, ME1500 (110-pin)
CONTEC C-NET(98)P2, C-NET (9N)E (110-pin), C-NET(9N)C (ExtCard)
CONTEC C-NET(PC)C PCMCIA Ethernet
Eiger Labs EPX-10BT
Fujitsu FMV-J182, FMV-J182A

Fujitsu MB86960A, MB86965A
Fujitsu MBH10303, MBH10302 Ethernet PCMCIA
Fujitsu Towa LA501 Ethernet
HITACHI HT-4840-11
NextCom J Link NC5310
RATOC REX-5588, REX-9822, REX-4886, and REX-R280
RATOC REX-9880/9881/9882/9883
TDK LAC-98012, LAC-98013, LAC-98025, LAC-9N011 (110-pin)
TDK LAK-CD021, LAK-CD021A, LAK-CD021BX
Ungermann-Bass Access/PC N98C+(PC85152, PC85142), Access/NOTE N98(PC86132) (110-pin)
Adapters supported by the fxp driver include:
Intel EtherExpress PRO/10
Intel InBusiness 10/100
Intel PRO/100B / EtherExpressPRO/100 B PCI Adapter *
Intel PRO/100+ Management Adapter
Intel PRO/100 VE Desktop Adapter
Intel PRO/100 M Desktop Adapter
Intel PRO/100 S Desktop, Server and Dual-Port Server Adapters
Contec C-NET(PI)-100TX (PC-98)
NEC PC-9821Ra20, Rv20, Xv13, Xv20 internal 100Base-TX (PC-98)
NEC PC-9821X-B06 (PC-98)
Many on-board network interfaces on Intel motherboards
The ex driver supports the following Ethernet adapters:
Intel EtherExpress Pro/10
Intel EtherExpress Pro/10+
The Olicom OC2220
The ie driver provides supports the following 8 and 16bit ISA Ethernet cards that are based on the Intel
i82586 chip:
3COM 3C507
AT&T EN100
AT&T Starlan 10
AT&T Starlan Fiber
Intel EtherExpress 16
RACAL Interlan NI5210
The ep driver supports Ethernet adapters based on the 3Com 3C5x9 Etherlink III Parallel Tasking chipset,
including:
3Com 3C1 CF
3Com 3C509-TP, 3C509-BNC, 3C509-Combo, 3C509-TPO, 3C509-TPC ISA
3Com 3C509B-TP, 3C509B-BNC, 3C509B-Combo, 3C509B-TPO, 3C509B-TPC ISA
3Com 3C529, 3C529-TP MCA
3Com 3C562/3C563 PCMCIA
3Com 3C569B-J-TPO, 3C569B-J-COMBO CBUS
3Com 3C574-TX, 3CCFE574BT, 3CXFE574BT, 3C3FE574BT PCMCIA
3Com 3C579-TP, 3C579-BNC EISA
267 R-Studio Manual
3Com 3C589, 3C589B, 3C589C, 3C589D, 3CXE589DT PCMCIA

3Com 3CCFEM556B, 3CCFEM556BI PCMCIA
3Com 3CXE589EC, 3CCE589EC, 3CXE589ET, 3CCE589ET PCMCIA
3Com Megahertz 3CCEM556, 3CXEM556, 3CCEM556B, 3CXEM556B PCMCIA
3Com OfficeConnect 3CXSH572BT, 3CCSH572BT PCMCIA
Farallon EtherMac PCMCIA
The el driver supports the 3Com 3c501 8bit ISA Ethernet card.
The xl driver supports the following hardware:
3Com 3c900-TPO *
3Com 3c900-COMBO *
3Com 3c905-TX *
3Com 3c905-T4 *
3Com 3c900B-TPO *
3Com 3c900B-TPC *
3Com 3c900B-FL *
3Com 3c900B-COMBO *
3Com 3c905B-T4 *
3Com 3c905B-TX *
3Com 3c905B-FX *
3Com 3c905B-COMBO *
3Com 3c905C-TX *
3Com 3c980, 3c980B, and 3c980C server adapters
3Com 3cSOHO100-TX OfficeConnect adapters
3Com 3c450 HomeConnect adapters
3Com 3c555, 3c556 and 3c556B mini-PCI adapters
3Com 3C3SH573BT, 3C575TX, 3CCFE575BT, 3CXFE575BT, 3CCFE575CT, 3CXFE575CT,
3CCFEM656, 3CCFEM656B, and 3CCFEM656C, 3CXFEM656, 3CXFEM656B, and 3CXFEM656C
CardBus adapters
3Com 3c905-TX, 3c905B-TX 3c905C-TX, and 3c920B-EMB embedded adapters
Both the 3C656 family of CardBus cards and the 3C556 family of MiniPCI cards have a built-in proprietary
modem. Neither the xl driver nor any other driver supports this modem.
The vx driver supports the following cards:
3Com 3c590 EtherLink III PCI *
3Com 3c592 EtherLink III EISA
3Com 3c595 Fast EtherLink III PCI in 10 Mbps mode *
3Com 3c597 Fast EtherLink III EISA in 10 Mbps mode
Crystal Semiconductor CS89x0-based NICs (cs driver)
The sn driver supports SMC9xxx based ISA and PCMCIA cards including:
3Com Megahertz X-Jack Ethernet PC-Card CC-10BT
The xe driver supports the following cards:
Xircom CreditCard Ethernet (PS-CE2-10)
Xircom CreditCard Ethernet + Modem 28 (PS-CEM-28)
Xircom CreditCard Ethernet + Modem 33 (CEM33)
Xircom CreditCard 10/100 (CE3, CE3B)

Xircom CreditCard Ethernet 10/100 + Modem 56 (CEM56)

Xircom RealPort Ethernet 10 (RE10)
Xircom RealPort Ethernet 10/100 (RE100)
Xircom RealPort Ethernet 10/100 + Modem 56 (REM56, REM56G)
Accton Fast EtherCard-16 (EN2226)
Compaq Netelligent 10/100 PC Card (CPQ-10/100)
Intel EtherExpress Pro/100 PC Card Mobile Adapter 16 (Pro/100 M16A)
Other similar devices using the same hardware may also be supported.
Adapters supported by the lge driver include:
SMC TigerCard 1000 (SMC9462SX) *
D-Link DGE-500SX *
The txp driver supports the following cards:
3Com 3CR990-TX-95 *
3Com 3CR990-TX-97 *
3Com 3cR990B-TXM *
3Com 3CR990SVR95 *
3Com 3CR990SVR97 *
3Com 3cR990B-SRV *
The bge driver provides support for various NICs based on the Broadcom BCM570x family of Gigabit
Ethernet controller chips, including the following:
3Com 3c996-T (10/100/1000baseTX) *
Dell PowerEdge 1750 integrated BCM5704C NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
Dell PowerEdge 2550 integrated BCM5700 NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
Dell PowerEdge 2650 integrated BCM5703 NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
IBM x235 server integrated BCM5703x NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
HP ProLiant NC7760 embedded Gigabit NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
HP ProLiant NC7770 PCI-X Gigabit NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
HP ProLiant NC7781 embedded PCI-X Gigabit NIC (10/100/1000baseTX) *
Netgear GA302T (10/100/1000baseTX) *
SysKonnect SK-9D21 (10/100/1000baseTX) *
SysKonnect SK-9D41 (1000baseSX) *
The em driver supports Gigabit Ethernet adapters based on the Intel 82540, 82541PI, 82542, 82543, 82544,
82546, 82546EB and 82547 controller chips:
Intel PRO/1000 CT Network Connection (82547)
Intel PRO/1000 F Server Adapter (82543)
Intel PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter (82542)*
Intel PRO/1000 GT Desktop Adapter (82541PI)
Intel PRO/1000 MF Dual Port Server Adapter (82546)
Intel PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (82545)
Intel PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX) (82545)
Intel PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter (82540)
Intel PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter (82541)
Intel PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter (82546)
Intel PRO/1000 MT Quad Port Server Adapter (82546EB)
Intel PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter (82545)
269 R-Studio Manual
Intel PRO/1000 T Desktop Adapter (82544)

Intel PRO/1000 T Server Adapter (82543)
Intel PRO/1000 XF Server Adapter (82544)
Intel PRO/1000 XT Server Adapter (82544)
The gx driver supports Gigabit Ethernet adapters based on the Intel 82542 and 82543 controller chips:
Intel PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter (82542)
Intel PRO/1000 F Server Adapter (82543)
Intel PRO/1000 T Server Adapter (82543)
The hme driver supports the on-board Ethernet interfaces of many Sun UltraSPARC workstation and server
models. Cards supported by the hme driver include:
Sun PCI SunSwift Adapter
Sun SBus SunSwift Adapter ``( hme'' and ``SUNW,hme'')
Sun PCI Sun100BaseT Adapter 2.0
Sun SBus Sun100BaseT 2.0
Sun PCI Quad FastEthernet Controller
Sun SBus Quad FastEthernet Controller
The my driver provides support for various NICs based on the Myson chipset. Supported models include:
Myson MTD800 PCI Fast Ethernet chip
Myson MTD803 PCI Fast Ethernet chip
Myson MTD89X PCI Gigabit Ethernet chip
Broadcom BCM4401 based Fast Ethernet adapters (bfe driver) *
The re driver supports RealTek RTL8139C+, RTL8169, RTL8169S and RTL8110S based Fast Ethernet and
Gigabit Ethernet adapters including:
Alloy Computer Products EtherGOLD 1439E 10/100 (8139C+) *
Compaq Evo N1015v Integrated Ethernet (8139C+) *
Corega CG-LAPCIGT Gigabit Ethernet (8169S) *
Gigabyte 7N400 Pro2 Integrated Gigabit Ethernet (8110S) *
PLANEX COMMUNICATIONS Inc. GN-1200TC (8169S) *
Xterasys XN-152 10/100/1000 NIC (8169) *
The ixgb driver supports the following cards:
Intel PRO/10GbE LR Server Adapter *
Intel PRO/10GbE SR Server Adapter *

Index 270
Advanced 37
Index Apply 84
Auto Detect 112
Choose Variants 112
Code pages 155
-A- Connect to Remote 5, 149
Create Image 5, 62
Add missing disks 132, 135
Create Region 5, 59
Advanced Data Recovery 37
Create virtual volume sets or RAIDs 5, 84
Advanced RAID 5 Layouts 94
File Mask 35
Advanced RAID 6 Layout 94
Go! 161
Allocation 155
Known File Types 37
Apple CoreStorage/File Vault/Fusion Drive Volumes
Next Pattern 155
138
OK 161
Apple RAIDs 135
Open Drive Files 5, 18
Apply changes immediately 84
Open Image 5, 62
Open in Hex Editor 37
-B- Open Local Drives
Preview 29
5, 149
Bad Sectors 181 Previous Pattern 155

Bad Sectors settings Recover 18
Default read attempts 10 Recover Marked 18
Pattern to fill bad blocks 10 Refresh 5
Set for all drives 10 Remove 5
Basic File Recovery 18 Rename 18
Binary (byte to byte copy) Rename All 18
Copy range 66 Reset 37
Copy whole object 66 Save Changes 155
Offset 66 Scan 5, 37
Size 66 Set for all 35
Block order 84 Skip 18
Broken File Name Skip All 18
Prompt: 73 Stop 5
Rename and change all invalid symbols to: 73 Byte to byte image 62
Skip 73
Broken File Name options
Change all invalid symbols to 18 -C-
Edit broken symbols only 18
File name 18 Connect to R-Studio settings
Allow connection from any address 150
New name 18
Allow connection from the host 150
Button
Password 150
Clear All 181
Port 150
Mark 181
Server 150
Recover 181
Save to File 181 Connecting over the Internet 150
Select All 181 Connecting to DeepSpar Disk Imager™ manually
206
Buttons
Contact information and technical support 4
Add 37
Create menu

271 R-Studio Technical Documentation
Create menu Fill 155

Add Empty Space 84 Find/Mark 26
Add Missing Disk 84 Go to 161
Copy object to... 66 Go To Offset 161
Create Exclusive Region 61 Memory Usage 183
Create Region 59 Open Scan Information File 37
Create Virtual Block RAID & Autodetect 84 Please configure R-Studio Agent for Mac 146
Create Virtual Mirror 84 Please configure R-Studio Agent for Windows
Create Virtual Volume Set 84 144
Show drive map... 206 Preset name 79
Creating and saving your own RAID configuration 79 Raid Parameters Detection 112
Creating Custom Patterns 165 Recover 18, 71, 149
Creating Startup Disks for Mac and Linux Computers Recover (Advanced) 73
219 R-Studio Agent for Linux Configuration 147
Cross-linked folders 177 Save Scan Information File 37
Customizing File Types 50, 52 Scan 37
Customizing File Types-II 54 Scan Information 37
Search 161
Select Interface 206
-D- Settings 10
There is not enough space on the disk 18
Data Copy in Text/hexadecimal editor 163
Waiting for remote connection 150
Data Formats and Multipliers 180
Direct 155
Data Recovery Issues 177
Disk scan 5, 37
Data Recovery on HFS/HFS+ File System 180
Drive map 206
Data recovery over network 143
Connect to the remote computer 149 Drive menu
Connect to DDI 206
Connect To Remote 149
DDI Drive Map 206
Create Image 62
DeepSpar Disk Imager 206
Open Drive Files 18
Description Files for RAID Configuration 120
Open Drive Files Sorted By 72
Devices to Store Recovered Files 231
Open Image File 62
Dialog box
Open Local Drives 149
Forensic Log Settings 184
Open Scan Informaiton 37
Save File Names 75
Real File System Structure 72
Dialog boxes
Recover All Files 71
Block information 206
Remove Scan Informaiton 37
Broken File Name 18
Save Scan Informaiton 37
Connect to Remote Computer 149
Scan 37
Connect to R-Studio 146, 147, 150
Copy Options 66 Drives Copy Wizard 66
Create Exclusive Region 61
Create Image
Create Region
62
59
-E-
Edit Block RAID Layout Presets 79 Edit menu
Edit User's File Types 50 Bookmarks 161
File mask 35 Fill 155
File Types 37 Find 161
Files with bad sectors 181 Find Next 161

Index 272
Edit menu Rescan 177

Find Previous 161 Save File Names to File 75
Find Template Signature Next 155 Set As Default Target 177
Find Template Signature Previous 155 Show Files in HexEditor 164
Save Changes 155 View/Edit 155
Editor tabs File name: 75
Allocation 155 File Recovery Lists 75
Direct 155 File search 5
Std 155 File signature properties 50
Unlimited 155 File Systems settings
Enable Forensic Mode 184 Default encoding for Ext2/Ext3/Ext4/UFS volumes
Event log 36 10
Exclusive Region 61 Default encoding for HFS volumes 10
Exclusive Region options Disable any sorting 10
Exclusive Regions 61 Minimize disk access 10
Offset: 61 Show deleted empty folders 10
Size: 61 File Type Signature Specification 52, 54
Start: 61 File Types
Extended Information Recovery 179 Clear All 37
Reload User's File Types 37
Reset to Recommended 37
-F- Revert to Default 37
Select All 37
File Already Exists
Set as Default 37
Overwrite 73
File Types properties 50
Overwrite Bigger 73
Files and Sectors 164
Overwrite Older 73
Find and Mark Multiple Files 72
Overwrite Smaller 73
Find options
Prompt 73
Date 26
Rename 73
Deleted files 26
Skip 73
Existing files 26
File Information (R-Studio Technician) 182
File Id 26
File mask options
Files 26
Date 35
Find/Mark mode 26
Deleted files 35
Folders 26
Existing files 35
Look in 26
Match case 35
Match case 26
Show empty folders 35
Recovery chances 26
Size from/up to 35
Regular expression 26
Use advanced options 35
Size from/up to 26
File menu
Use advanced options 26
Clone file sectors 206
Find/Mark options
Clone marked file sectors 206
Find all 26
Close All Previews 29
Find first 26
Goto Target 177
Find last 26
Load File Names from File and Mark 75
Find next 26
Preview 29
Find previous 26
Recover 18
Mark all 26
Recover Marked 18

Find/Mark options Linux mdadm RAIDs 139

Set for all 26 Log settings
Unmark all 26 Disk 10
Finding Previous File Versions 28 Error 10
Firewall 150 File name 10
Forensic Data Collection Audit Log 184 File System 10
Forensic Mode 184 Files 10
Found offsets pane 112 Information 10
Maximum messages in the Event Log 10
Network 10
-H- Partition 10
Recover 10
Help menu
Save log to file 10
Change Language 5
Success 10
Hidden Attribute
Warning 10
Keep 73
Prompt 73
Remove 73
-M-
Mac Pro RAID 94
-I- Main settings
Auto-refresh Drive Tree 10
Image 62
Check for update 10
Image options
Debug Mode 10
Compressed image (R-Drive Image compatible)
62 Enable Write 10, 66, 155
Create scan information file 62 File name 10
Estimated size 62 HexView templates path 10
Image name 62 Location 10
Image split size 62 Max changes buffer size 10
Password 62 Reset all hidden notifications 10
Pattern to fill bad blocks 62 User's file mask presets 10
Plain image 62 User's file types 10
Read attempts 62 User's RAID layout 10
IntelligentScan Technology 176 Mass file recovery 71
Introduction to R-Studio 1 Mass File Recovery Options 73
Memory Usage 183
Automatic 10
-K- Disable memory control
Process Memory 183
10
Known File Types settings System Memory Physical 183

Clear All 10 System Memory Swap 183
Edit User's File Types 10
Messages
Reload User's File Types 10 Cannot connect 144
Reset 10 Double-click a logical disk... 18
Select All 10 Too many files... 18, 71, 199
Mirrors 81
-L- Missing Disk 84
Linux LVM 141

Index 274
Index Block Size 200

INodes Per Volume 200
-N- Int13 Drive Number 200
Int13 Extension Version 200
NAT 150
Last Check Time 200
Nested and Non-Standard RAID Levels 102
Last Mount Time 200
Last Write Time 200
-O- LDM Component ID
LDM Disk AltName
200
200
Object Copy 66 LDM Disk DriveHint 200
Offset 84 LDM Disk GUID 200
LDM Disk ID 200
-P- LDM DiskGroup GUID

LDM Host GUID 200
200
Panels LDM Partition ID 200

Files 18 LDM Volume GUID 200
Folders 18 LDM Volume ID 200
Log 18, 36 Major version 200
Main 5 Maximum transfer 200
Panes MFT Mirror Position 200
Bookmarks 155 MFT position 200
Data Interpreter 155 MFT record size 200
Find Results 155 Minor version 200
Template 155 Name 200
Pattern Example I 168 NTFS Information 200
Pattern Example II 172 Number of FAT Copies 200
Previewing files 29 Offset of Logical Disk 200
Properties tab OS object 200
Active FAT copy 200 Parsed Boot Records 200
Block Size 200 Parsed File Entries 200
Blocks Per Volume 200 Partition number 200
Boot Directory Cluster 200 Partition Offset 200
Buffer Alignment 200 Partition Size 200
Bus Type 200 Partition Type 200
Cluster size 200 Physical Drive Geometry 200
Creator OS 200 Raid Block Size 200
Device Identification 200 Recognized Ext2/3/4FS 200
Drive Control 200 Recognized FAT 200
Drive Type 200 Recognized NTFS 200
Estimated Size 200 Root Directory Length 200
Ext2/3/4FS Information 200 Root Directory Offset 200
Fat Bits (12,16,32) 200 R-Studio driver 200
FAT Information 200 SCSI Address 200
First Cluster Offset 200 Sector Size 200
First FAT Offset 200 Size 200
First SuperBlock Offset 200 Size of One FAT Table 200
I/O Tries 200 Supposed Parents Count 200
I/O Unit 200 Volume size 200

R-Studio Agent 144

R-Studio Agent Emergency 143, 239
-Q- Contact information and technical support 239
Creating Startup Disks 239
Questionable folders 177
Disk Controllers 248
Hardware Compatibility List 248
-R- Installing R-Studio Agent Emergency Startup
Media Creator 239
RAID 0 81 Network Cards 258
RAID 1 81 Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Agent
RAID 4 84 Emergency Startup Disk 245
RAID 5 84 R-Studio Agent for Linux 147
RAID 5 Operations 84 R-Studio Agent for Mac 146
RAID block size 84 R-Studio Agent for Mac main panel 146
RAID consistency 114 R-Studio Agent for Windows 144
RAID for HP Servers 90 R-Studio Agent for Windows main panel 144
RAID Parameter Detection 112 R-Studio Emergency 212
RAID with Parity Delays 90 Contact Informaiton and Technical Support 212
RAID10 (1+0) 103 Creating Startup Disks 213
RAID1E 104 Disk Images 224
RAID5E 106 Disk Scan 223
RAID5EE 108 Emergency agent 225
RAID6E 110 File Recovery 222
Recover options Hardware Compatibility List 234
Condense successful restoration events: 18 Installing R-Studio Emergency Startup Media
Do not recover duplicate files from Extra Found Creator 213
Files 18 Log 231
Ignore file mask: 18 Network Drives 230
Local computer 149 Operation 219
Recover alternative data streams: 18 Properties and Text/Hexadecimal Viewer 230
Recover extended attributes: 18 Safely Remove Hardware icon 222
Recover metafiles 18 Searching for a File 222
Recover real folders structure 18 Starting a Computer with the R-Studio Emergency
Recover security: 18 Startup Disks 219
Remote computer 149 Technical Information 229
Restore folder structure: 18 R-Studio Emergency Startup Media Creator 213,
Restore from root 18 239
Region 59 R-Studio features 1
Region options R-Studio switches 199
Disk size 59
Size
Start
59
59
-S-
Regular expressions 36 S.M.A.R.T. Info 5
Remote install 144 Save File Names 75
Reverse RAID of a RAID 128 Save only marked files/folders from... 75
Reverse RAID of an Object 126 Scan options
Reverse RAIDs 126 Disk size 37
Rows count 84 File Systems 37

Index 276
Scan options Create Image File 62

Offset 37 Create Region 59
Save to File 37 Create Reverse RAID 126, 128
Scan Areas 37 Create Virtual Mirror 84
Size 37 Create Virtual RAID5 84
Start 37 Create Virtual Stripe Set 84
Search options Create Virtual Volume Set 84
ANSI 161 Cross Linked Folders 177
Exhaustive search 161 Edit 59, 61
From Address 161 Exclude area 59
From current position 161 File format 75
From start position 161 File mask 35
HEX 161 Find Next 26
Match case 161 Find Previous 26
Not Equal 161 Find Previous Versions of the File 28
OEM 161 Find Template Signature Next 155
Reverse 161 Find Template Signature Previous 155
Search at offset 161 Find/Mark 26
UNICODE 161 Get Info 18
Searching for a File 26 Go Target 177
Sector status 206 Links 177
Settings Log Filter... 36
Bad Sectors 10 Map of file 206
File Systems 10 Mark 18, 26
Known File Types 10 Mark All 18
Log 10 Merge Down 37
Main 10 Merge Down All 37
Memory Usage 10 Merge Selected 37
Symbolic Links 10 Mount 62
Shortcut menu No recalculate 180
Add Custom offset 112 Open Drive Files 18
Add Empty Space 84 Open Drive Files Sorted By 72
Add Missing Disk 84 Open Scan Information 37
Add missing disks 141 Preview 26, 29
Add to RAID 84 Real File System Structure 72
Always recalculate 180 Recheck Recovery Chances 18
Check RAID consistency... 114 Recover 18, 26
Clear Log... 36 Recover All Files 71
Clone file sectors 206 Recover Marked 18
Clone marked file sectors 206 Remove All Scanned Information 37
Copy (Column Name) 36 Remove Region 59
Copy as "ANSI" 163 Save File Names to File 75
Copy as "Binary data" 163 Save Log to File... 36
Copy as "UNICODE" 163 Save Scan Information 37
Copy as File Signature 163 Save sub folders 75
Copy Editor Display 163 Scan 37
Copy Selected Text 36 Select From 155
Create Exclusive Region 61 Select To 155

Shortcut menu Find 26

Set As Default Target 177 Find All 26
Show drive map... 206 Find Next 26
Show password 149 Find Previous 26
Toggle Bookmark 155 Goto 155
Units type recalculate 180 Mark All 18
Unlock encrypted drive 138 Save Changes 155
Unmark 18 Save to Binary File... 155
Unmark All 18 Save to Hexadecimal File 155
Unmount 62 Select All 155
View/Edit 155 Settings 10
Write BOM 75 Unmark All 18
Smart drive copy
Copy all partitions onto original places 66
Expand/Shrink partition to whole disk 66 -U-
Fixed active partition 66
Unlimited 155
One partition after another 66
Smart partition copy
Copy to: 66
Copy without stretching 66
-V-
Free space before 66 View menu
Partition size 66 ANSI 155
Partition type 66 Arrange 18
Startup Media Troubleshooting Options 213 Bookmarks View 155
Std 155 Contents Columns 18
Storage Pools 132 Data Interpreter View 155
Stripe Sets 81 Device View 5
Symbolic Links Devices 5
Automatic recovery (Default) 10 Event Log 5, 18
Automatic recovery without symlink object path Files panel 18
conversion 10 Folders panel 18
Recovery as it is 10 Log panel 18
Syntaxis of a Description File for RAID Configurations OEM 155
115 Parents Tab 5
System Requirements 4 Properties 5, 200
Properties Tab 5
Properties View 5, 155
-T- Scan Information Tab 5
Sectors View 155
Tabs
Status bar 5, 18
Parents 84
Template View 155
Properties 200
Toolbar 5, 18, 155
UNICODE 155
Text/hexadecimal editor 154
UNICODE+ 155
ANSI/OEM/UNICODE/UNICODE+ 155
Save to Hexadecimal File 155 Virtual volume sets and RAIDs 79
Volume sets and RAIDs 79
Tools menu
Debug Mode 199 Volume Sets, Stripe Sets, and Mirrors 81
File mask 35

Index 278
-W-
Windoes Storage Spaces 132
Window
RAID consistency check 114
RAID Sequence 94
Windows Dynamic Disks 129
Working with RAID 6 Presets
Reed-Solomonr 86
Working with RAID6 (Double Xor) Presets 88

Recovery Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recovery Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recovery Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Manual

© R-Tools Technology Inc 2019.

No warranty is made in regard to specifications or features.

II Data Recovery Using R-Studio 17

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

III Text/hexadecimal Editor 154

IV Technical Information and Troubleshooting 176

V Working with the Third-Party Hardware 206

VI R-Studio Emergency 212

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Installing R-Studio Em ergency Startup Media Creator

VII R-Studio Agent Emergency 239

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

1.1 R-Studio Features

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

· Support for NTFS deduplication.

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

To learn more about the IntelligentScan technology, go to the IntelligentScan topic .

1.3 Contact Information and Technical Support

File Recovery FAQ: http://www.r-tt.com/File_Recovery_FAQ.shtml

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

1.4 R-Studio Main Panel

A logical disk may be represented by its name or its partition.

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

S.M.A.R.T. Info for a Hard Drive

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Normal: This state indicates

Warning: This state indicates

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Critical: This state indicates

Panel view options

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Open Drive Files

Create Virtual RAID

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

To select the units

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Specifies the path for pattern description files for Text/?

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Symbolic Links dialog box

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Only an object is selected for

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Known File Types

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Known File Types

Bad Sectors settings

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

II Data Recovery Using R-Studio

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

To recover deleted files from a logical disk (recognized partition),

Panel view options

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

The Toolbar Select/?clear Toolbar on the View menu

© 2019 R-Tools Technology Inc.

Marked deleted file

Target of a hard link